Yamaha | CX-A5200 | Owner’s Manual | Yamaha CX-A5200 Owner’s Manual

Yamaha CX-A5200 Owner’s Manual
AV Pre-Amplifier
Owner’s Manual
• This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home.
• This manual explains preparations and operations for everyday users of the unit.
• Read the supplied booklet “Quick Start Guide” before using the unit.
EN
CONTENTS
Introduction
5
3 Connecting a TV and playback devices .........................................33
Connecting a TV ............................................................................................................................................33
Accessories................................................................................... 5
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)..................................................................................34
About this book ............................................................................ 5
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)..........................................................................................36
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel .................................................................................................37
About remote control .................................................................... 6
4 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................38
Batteries ......................................................................................................................................................... 6
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models) .................................38
Operating range of the remote control......................................................................................................... 6
FEATURES
DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only) .....................................38
5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna .....39
7
Connecting the network cable.....................................................................................................................39
Preparing the wireless antenna ...................................................................................................................39
What you can do with the unit ........................................................ 7
6 Connecting other devices............................................................40
AV CONTROLLER........................................................................................................................................... 12
Connecting a device with analog multichannel output .............................................................................40
MusicCast CONTROLLER.............................................................................................................................. 12
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function ........................................................................40
Part names and functions .............................................................13
7 Connecting the power cable ........................................................41
Front panel ................................................................................................................................................... 13
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language ........................................42
Front display (indicators) ............................................................................................................................ 15
Rear panel..................................................................................................................................................... 16
9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings..................................43
Remote control ............................................................................................................................................ 18
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) ................44
Multi Measure................................................................................................................................................46
PREPARATIONS
Angle/Height Measure ..................................................................................................................................47
19
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) ................................................................................47
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)........................................................................50
General setup procedure ..............................................................19
Checking the measurement results .............................................................................................................53
1 Placing speakers ........................................................................20
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments.................................................................................................53
Basic speaker configuration ........................................................................................................................ 21
Error messages .............................................................................................................................................54
Input/output jacks and cables .................................................................................................................... 28
Warning messages ........................................................................................................................................55
2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers ..........................30
11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly .................................56
Connecting a power amplifier ..................................................................................................................... 30
Connecting with a wireless router (access point) .......................................................................................56
Connecting subwoofers............................................................................................................................... 31
Connecting the unit to a wireless network..................................................................................................57
12 Connecting to the MusicCast network ........................................62
MusicCast CONTROLLER ..............................................................................................................................62
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network ..................................................................................................62
En
2
PLAYBACK
63
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ...................90
Media sharing setup .....................................................................................................................................90
Basic playback procedure .............................................................63
Playback of PC music contents ....................................................................................................................91
Selecting an HDMI output jack .................................................................................................................... 63
Listening to Internet radio ............................................................94
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) ......................................................................................64
Playback of Internet radio............................................................................................................................94
Registering a scene ...................................................................................................................................... 64
Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay..................................97
Selecting the sound mode.............................................................65
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents ....................................................................................................97
Playing back with surround effects optimized for the scene (SURROUND:AI).......................................... 66
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) ..............99
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3) ............................................................................. 66
Multi-zone configuration examples .............................................................................................................99
Enjoying unprocessed playback.................................................................................................................. 70
Preparing the multi zone system ...............................................................................................................100
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites) .............................................................................96
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct).......................................................................................... 71
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 ...........................................................................................................103
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer) .................................................................................................................... 71
Registering favorite items (shortcut) ........................................... 105
Registering an item.....................................................................................................................................105
Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models) ....................................................72
Recalling a registered item.........................................................................................................................105
Viewing the current status.......................................................... 106
Setting the frequency steps......................................................................................................................... 72
Switching information on the front display ..............................................................................................106
Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 73
Viewing the status information on the TV .................................................................................................107
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) .............................................................................................. 73
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu)........................................................................... 108
Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
Russia models only) .....................................................................75
Option menu items.....................................................................................................................................109
Preparing the DAB tuning ............................................................................................................................ 76
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................ 76
Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)....................................................................................... 77
Displaying the DAB information .................................................................................................................. 78
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label ........................................................................... 79
Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
Russia models only) .....................................................................81
Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 81
Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)......................................................................................... 82
Radio Data System tuning ........................................................................................................................... 84
Playing back music via Bluetooth ..................................................85
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit ...................................................................................... 85
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device.........................86
Connecting a USB storage device ............................................................................................................... 86
Playback of USB storage device contents .................................................................................................. 87
En
3
CONFIGURATIONS
115
APPENDIX
153
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) ................................ 115
Additional Features.................................................................... 153
Setup menu items ...................................................................................................................................... 116
Playing back audio from the unit on Bluetooth®-enabled speakers/headphones .................................153
Speaker....................................................................................................................................................... 121
Using wireless surround speakers (MusicCast Surround function) .........................................................155
Sound.......................................................................................................................................................... 125
Frequently asked questions ........................................................ 156
Scene .......................................................................................................................................................... 131
Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 157
Video/HDMI................................................................................................................................................. 132
First, check the following: ..........................................................................................................................157
Network ...................................................................................................................................................... 135
Power, system and remote control ...........................................................................................................157
Bluetooth.................................................................................................................................................... 138
Audio ...........................................................................................................................................................158
Multi Zone................................................................................................................................................... 139
Video............................................................................................................................................................160
System ........................................................................................................................................................ 141
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)............ 147
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
Russia models)............................................................................................................................................161
ADVANCED SETUP menu items ................................................................................................................. 148
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only) ..............................................161
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR)................................................................ 148
Bluetooth ....................................................................................................................................................162
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)........................................................................................... 148
USB and network ........................................................................................................................................163
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) ........................................................ 148
Error indications on the front display .......................................... 165
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) .......................................................................................... 149
Glossary .................................................................................... 166
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK)....................................................... 149
Audio information (audio decoding format) .............................................................................................166
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) ...................................................................................... 149
Audio Information (Others) ........................................................................................................................168
Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE) .................................................................... 150
HDMI and video information ......................................................................................................................168
Backing up/recovering the settings (BACKUP/RESTORE)........................................................................ 150
Network information ..................................................................................................................................169
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)............................................................................................... 150
Yamaha technologies .................................................................................................................................169
Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE).................................................................................................... 151
Supported devices and file formats ............................................. 170
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) ............................................................................................... 151
Supported devices......................................................................................................................................170
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network .............................. 152
File formats .................................................................................................................................................170
Updating the unit’s firmware .................................................................................................................... 152
Video signal flow........................................................................ 171
Video conversion table ...............................................................................................................................171
Multi-zone output ...................................................................... 172
Information on HDMI.................................................................. 172
HDMI Control...............................................................................................................................................172
Audio Return Channel (ARC) ......................................................................................................................174
HDMI signal compatibility ..........................................................................................................................174
Trademarks............................................................................... 175
Specifications............................................................................ 176
En
4
Introduction
Accessories
About this book
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
# AM antenna
The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the CX-A5200 (U.S.A. model), unless
otherwise specified.
# YPAO microphone
In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.
(except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)
Some features are not available in certain regions.
Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without
notice.
This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
# Microphone base
Pole
This manual describes all the “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to
“iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
# FM antenna
(except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)
Icons used in this manual
Y
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
X
# Power cable
indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
# Remote control
# DAB/FM antenna
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East
and Russia models only)
# Batteries (AAA, LR03, UM-4) (x2)
# Quick Start Guide
* (Except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
One of the above FM antennas is supplied depending on the region of purchase.
* The microphone base and pole are used for angle/height measurement during YPAO.
* The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase.
En
5
About remote control
This section explains how to use the supplied remote control.
Batteries
Insert the batteries the right way round.
Operating range of the remote control
Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the
operating range shown below.
Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°
30°
En
6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
The unit is equipped with the various useful features.
Playing back TV audio in surround
sound with a single HDMI cable
connection (Audio Return Channel:
ARC) (p.33)
Providing a realistic feel and
surround effect optimized for the
scene of the content
(SURROUND:AI) (p.66)
The AI incorporated in the DSP analyzes the scene of the
content and creates the optimal surround effect for it.
Backlit remote control (p.18)
This unit’s backlit remote control provides excellent
visibility, making it easy to use, even in a dark room.
Additional Features (p.66)
This unit is equipped with a function for connecting speakers
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI
This AI instantaneously analyzes scenes by focusing on
wirelessly. Content being played back by this unit can be
cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the
sound elements such as “dialogue”, “background music”,
sent to a Bluetooth device (speakers, headphones, etc.)
TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
“ambient sounds” and “sound effects” as well as optimizes
(p.153).
the surround effect in real time.
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from external
device
More advanced ENTERTAINMENT
sound programs (p.67)
function is used, the surround speakers and subwoofer can
power beyond conventional sound field effects.
also be wireless. (p.155)
Various wireless connection
methods (p.56)
The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to
connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
By processing front left and front right sound fields
network cable connection.
individually, the ENTERTAINMENT sound programs are
further improved in acoustic positioning and sound
transition. These programs allow you to enjoy clearer vocal
and instrumental sounds, distinct narrations, and more
In addition, if a device that supports the MusicCast Surround
This creates a compelling sense of realism with expressive
Home Audio Network with
MusicCast (p.62)
dynamic sound effects.
The unit supports the MusicCast feature that allows you to
link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a
different room and play them back simultaneously, or
control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated
application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
En
7
CINEMA DSP
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires
for more than 30 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.
What is a sound field?
CINEMA DSP
We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard directly
Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound
but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the walls or
fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this
ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is affected by the
data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of sound programs
shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken together are what give
using CINEMA DSP.
us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.
By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source such as
This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”.
movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of that specific
content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you the sensation of
Conceptual diagram of a concert hall’s sound field
actually being in that scene.)
CINEMA DSP HD3
“CINEMA DSP HD3” is Yamaha’s flagship 3D sound field playback technology that takes full
advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the sound field data.
It delivers more than twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as
conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an
utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field.
Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit
Capability for reproducing reflections
Level
(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
CINEMA DSP HD3
CINEMA DSP 3D
Time
En
8
YPAO
YPAO is Yamaha original automatic calibration system to optimizing your sound and surround environment by using microphone measurement. It can be create ideal listening environment for
maximizing high sound quality contents playback by adjusting various speakers setting and the sound field automatically.
YPAO-R.S.C.
YPAO 3D measurement
In typical home, the sound has problems such as a blurred low-frequency range or a smearing
The direction (angle) of front, surround and presence speakers, and the height of presence
of the acoustical sound image caused by undesirable sound reflection from the walls or ceiling.
speakers as seen from the listening position is measured, and compensation is applied to
“YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only the unwanted reflections and produces the
maximize the 3D sound field effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP.
acoustic perfection for your listening environment.
Level
Compensation
Time
YPAO Volume
YPAO Volume automatically adjusts the high and low frequency levels at any volume level so
Level
High
that you hear natural sounds even at low volume.
Low
YPAO Volume ON
YPAO Volume OFF
Frequency
High
En
9
Unrivaled audio and video quality
You can enjoy unrivaled high-quality audio and videos with the unit.
High-resolution music enhancer
High-quality video processing
Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz
From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played back as
content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening of the
a high-quality image (p.132).
musicality in the original content (p.111).
• Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing
• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection
Before processing
Loudness
• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source
Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz
signal (such as a CD)
You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement.
Frequency
After processing
Loudness
Playback bandwidth of a
88.2/96 kHz signal
Frequency
En
10
Expandable to meet diverse needs
The unit provides excellent expandability which is applicable to all uses.
The best expandability in Yamaha
Multi-zone function
You can enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP - an 11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field.
The multi-zone function (p.99) allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).
Power amplifier
(The following shows examples of use.)
Enjoying music using speakers in another room
While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can listen to music through the
speakers of a different room.
Study room
(such as Zone2)
Living room (main zone)
Enjoying videos using a TV in another room (HDMI connection)
• Flexible connectivity (ready for balanced and unbalanced connections)
While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can enjoy videos and music
• High-quality audio transmission (XLR balanced pre-out)
being input via HDMI on a TV in a different room.
• XLR balanced input jacks for connecting a high-end such as CD player
Kitchen
(such as Zone4)
Living room (main zone)
En
11
Useful applications
The following applications provide you the flexibility to control the unit or assist you with the cable connections.
AV CONTROLLER
MusicCast CONTROLLER
“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a Wi-Fi enabled remote control for
“MusicCast CONTROLLER” is an application that allows you to link a MusicCast compatible
your Yamaha network products. This application provides you the flexibility to control the
device to other MusicCast compatible devices in other rooms and play them back
available inputs, volume, mute, power commands and playback source.
simultaneously. This app lets you use your smartphone or other mobile device instead of the
remote control to easily select music to play back as well as configure the unit and MusicCast
Functions
compatible devices.
• Power on/off and volume adjustment
• Input, scene and sound mode selection
Functions
• DSP Parameter adjustment
• Selecting and playing back various content
• Playback control (including music selection for some sources)
– Play back music from your mobile device
X
– Select an Internet radio station
– Play back music files stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play.
– Play back music files stored on a USB storage device
• Operating and configuring the unit
– Select the input source, adjust the volume and mute the audio output
– Select from a wide variety of sound processing features
X
For details, search for “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play.
En
12
Part names and functions
This section explains the functions of the parts of the unit.
Front panel
a
b c
d
e
f
MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
INPUT
SETUP
OPTION
AI
SCENE
STRAIGHT
1
2
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
3
INFO (WPS)
MEMORY
PRESET
FM
AM
TUNING
4
(CONNECT)
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
ENTER
RETURN
ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
HELP
AUX
PHONES
USB
5V
g
a MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the main zone.
Y
Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4 can be turned on/off individually (p.103).
b Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.134)
• HDMI Standby Through is enabled (p.134)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.136)
1A
YPAO MIC
L
SILENT CINEMA
AUDIO
R
h
i
e Remote control sensor
Opening the front panel door
Receives remote control signals (p.6).
f PURE DIRECT key
To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.71).
g INPUT knob
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
Selects an input source.
h Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.14).
i VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.139)
c AI indicator
Lights up when the SURROUND:AI is enabled (p.66)
d Front display
Displays information (p.15).
En
13
■ Inside of the front panel door
a
b
cd e
SETUP
AI
OPTION
fg
h
ij
SCENE
STRAIGHT
1
2
3
kl
m
INFO (WPS)
MEMORY
PRESET
FM
AM
TUNING
n
4
(CONNECT)
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
HELP
AUX
PHONES
USB
5V
1A
o
a SETUP key
Displays the Setup menu on the TV.
b Menu operations keys
Cursor keys: Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen.
c OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.108).
d HELP key
In the on-screen menu, the description of a term in the cursor
position appears on the TV. This key is enabled when the “?” icon
is displayed on the on-screen menu.
e AI key
Turns on/off the SURROUND:AI mode (p.66).
f STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
p
q
L
AUDIO
R
r
h SCENE keys
Select the assigned input source (including the selected radio
station or content when it is assigned), sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is
in standby mode (p.64).
i MULTI ZONE keys
ZONE 2-4: Enables/disables the audio output to each zone
(p.103).
ZONE CONTROL: Changes the zone that is controlled by the keys
and knobs on the front panel (p.103).
j INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.106).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button
configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.58).
Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as preset stations (p.73, p.77,
p.82).
Enters MusicCast CONTROLLER registration by holding down for 5
seconds (p.62).
Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
shortcuts (p.105).
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.65).
FM and DAB keys (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East
and Russia models only)
Switch between FM and DAB (p.76, p.73).
m PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/DAB radio station (p.77, p.83) (Australia, U.K.,
Europe, Middle East and Russia models) or a preset FM/AM radio
station (p.74) (other models).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.105).
n TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.73).
o USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.86).
p YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.44).
k MEMORY key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.70).
g PROGRAM keys
(U.S.A. model)
l FM and AM keys (except Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models)
Switch between FM and AM (p.73).
En
14
q PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
r AUX jacks
For connecting devices, such as CD players (p.37).
Front display (indicators)
a
b
c
d
g
e f
h
n
o
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SW2 SR
RPL SBL
SBR RPR
p q
a HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
OUT1/OUT2/OUT3
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal.
b Firmware update indicator
Lights up when a firmware update is available via the network
(p.152)
c LINK MASTER
Lights up when the unit is the master device of the MusicCast
network.
d ZONE indicators
Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.103).
e STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM radio station signal
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models) or an
FM/AM radio station signal (other models).
f PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.104).
g Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode
name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.106).
j
VOL. MUTE A-DRC
VIRTUAL YPAO VOL.
ZONE ZONE ZONE PARTY
3
4
IN OUT 1 2 3 2
LINK MASTER STEREO TUNED
Hi-Res ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
klm
i
qr
h Volume indicator
s
t
r VIRTUAL
Indicates the current volume.
i MUTE
Blinks when audio is temporarily muted.
Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.66), or the virtual surround
processing (p.69) is working.
s Channel indicators
j A-DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.110) is working.
k Wireless LAN indicator
Light up while the unit is connected to a wireless network (p.56).
Indicate channels (PRE OUT jacks) from which signals are output.
A Front (L)
S Front (R)
D Center
Y
F Surround (L)
This indicator may light up when the unit is added to the MusicCast
G Surround (R)
network. For details, see “Adding the unit to the MusicCast network”
H Surround back (L)
(p.62).
J Surround back (R)
l Bluetooth indicator
B Front presence (L)
Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.85).
N Front presence (R)
M Rear presence (L)
m Hi-Res
Lights up when the high-resolution mode (p.111) is working.
< Rear presence (R)
C Subwoofer (1)
n CINEMA DSP indicator
“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.66) is working.
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD3 is activated.
o ENHANCER
V Subwoofer (2)
t YPAO VOL.
Lights up when YPAO Volume is enabled (p.110).
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.71) is working.
p SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
q Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
En
15
Rear panel
a b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j k
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
AV 1
(HDCP2.2)
2
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
l
HDMI OUT
AV 7
(HDCP2.2)
c
m
n
NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
3
1
ARC
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
(ZONE OUT)
AC IN
MULTI CH INPUT
AV 1
CENTER
L
(1 MOVIE)
AV 2
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
TRIGGER
OUT
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
1
R
(5 STB)
PHONO
SURROUND
AUDIO 1
(7 TV)
L
SUR BACK
AUDIO 2
Y
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO 3
PB
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
PR
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
(3 MUSIC)
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
B AV 2
(FRONT)
R
1
2
SUBWOOFER
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
(REAR)
2
L (FRONT) 1
REAR
PRESENCE
ANTENNA
75ȍ
AUDIO 4
R
o
L
R REAR
PRESENCE
R FRONT
PRESENCE
FM
R SURROUND
BACK
p
AM
(2 RADIO)
R SURROUND
R FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
q
L FRONT
r
(U.S.A. model)
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper
connections.
En
16
L SURROUND
L SURROUND
BACK
s
L FRONT
PRESENCE
L REAR
PRESENCE
a PHONO jacks
s PRE OUT (XLR) jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.36).
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.31) or a power amplifier (p.30).
b MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting to a device that supports multichannel output and inputting audio signals (p.40)
c Wireless antenna
For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.56) and a Bluetooth connection (p.85).
d AUDIO 1-3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.36).
e HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.33). When using ARC, TV
audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
f AV 1-4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.34).
g COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1-2) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals
(p.35).
h HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.34).
i TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.40).
j REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other
devices from another room (p.102).
k HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.101).
l NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.39).
m RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details.
n AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.41).
o AUDIO 4 (XLR) jacks
For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting audio signals (p.36).
p ZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.100).
q ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to radio antennas (p.38).
r PRE OUT (RCA) jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.32) or to a power amplifier (p.31).
En
17
Remote control
a
b
c
d
e
a Remote control signal transmitter
SLEEP
PARTY
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
o
p
SCENE
f
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
hq
Turns on/off (standby) the zone selected with the MAIN/ZONE
switch.
c MAIN/ZONE switch
Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control (p.103).
d SLEEP key
Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min, 90 min,
60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to the standby mode.
INPUT
g
p PURE DIRECT key
b z (receiver power) key
MAIN 2 3 4
e PARTY key
f SCENE keys
PRESET
YELLOW
Switch with one touch between multiple settings set using the
SCENE function. Also, turn on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.64).
BLUE
i
j
g Input selection keys
q
kq
Select an input source for playback.
Y
Presses NET repeatedly to select a desired network source.
l
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
/MENU
r
AI
h PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.73).
Recall USB, Bluetooth, or network content that is registered
m
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
sq
tq
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
nq
as a shortcut (p.105).
i OPTION key
ENHANCER
Displays the option menu (p.108).
j SETUP key
Displays the setup menu (p.115)
TUNING
BAND
Enables/disables the Pure Direct (p.71).
q External device operation keys
Let you perform playback operations when “Bluetooth”, “USB” or
“NET”is selected as the input source, or control playback of the
HDMI Control-compatible playback device.
Y
The playback devices must support HDMI Control. Some HDMI
Control-compatible devices cannot be used.
Turns on/off the party mode (p.104).
BLUETOOTH
USB
o HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.63).
Transmits infrared signals.
TUNING
k Menu operation keys
Operates the menu.
l HELP key
In the on-screen menu, the description of a term in the cursor
position appears on the TV. This key is enabled when the “?” icon
is displayed on the on-screen menu.
m Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.65).
n Playback operation keys
Controls playback of the external device.
En
18
r AI key
Turns on/off the SURROUND:AI mode (p.66).
s VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
t MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Placing speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.20)
2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.30)
3 Connecting a TV and playback devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.33)
4 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.38)
5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.39)
6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.40)
7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.41)
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.42)
9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.43)
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.44)
11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.56)
12 Connecting to the MusicCast network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.62)
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
En
19
1 Placing speakers
The unit has 11.2-channel pre-amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 channel speakers (via a power amplifier) and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.99).
Ideal speaker layout
Functions of each speaker
Speaker type
R
E
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1
2
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
9
3
9
5
4
10°~30°
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Center 3
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).
Surround (L/R)
45
Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce
surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.
Surround back (L/R)
67
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
Front presence (L/R)
ER
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.
Rear presence (L/R)
TY
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.
10°~30°
Subwoofer 9
T
Y
Function
Front (L/R)
12
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of
other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and
place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.
X
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the left) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker
6
7
layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such
as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend
using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence
speakers for further spatial sounds).
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence
speakers.
En
20
Basic speaker configuration
If you do not multi-zone configurations, follow the procedure below to place the speakers in your room and connect them to the unit.
■ Placing speakers in your room
11.2-channel system [S7.2.4]
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This
(using both surround back and rear presence speakers)
section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a
X
highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
• To have a full effect of Dolby Atmos contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark. However,
you can also play back Dolby Atmos contents with the 7.1 system (using surround back speakers).
E
R
• To have a full effect of DTS:X contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark.
1
• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead
2
speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence speaker
9
layout” (p.26).
3
9
4
5
T
Y
6
7
X
• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.103), the rear presence left/right channel output is not available in the main
zone.
• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled
speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the
“Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.43).
En
21
9.2-channel system [S5.2.4] (using rear presence speakers)
9.2-channel system [S7.2.2] (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a highly-natural
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional
3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the
sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back
surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for
speakers.
enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
E
E
R
R
1
1
9
4
3
9
9
5
3
9
4
5
6
T
2
2
7
Y
X
X
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.103), the rear presence right/left channel output is not available in the main
YPAO (p.43).
zone.
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers
• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled
to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the
“Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.43).
En
22
7.1-channel system [S5.1.2] (using front presence speakers)
7.1-channel system [S7.1.0] (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional
This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy
speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not
extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
X
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
YPAO (p.43).
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers
to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
En
23
5.1-channel system
Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers)
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual surround
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround
speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA
Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound
FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”.
field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
1
2
4
9
5
3
X
You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).
En
24
Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)
2.1-channel system
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional
Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers
sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to
using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA
enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).
DSP).
E
R
1
9
2
3
X
X
When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1 system.
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO
(p.43).
En
25
Presence speaker layout
Dolby Enabled SP
Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.
The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height/Rear Height,
Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening
It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from speakers
environment (p.122).
that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.
X
• You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Cinema DSP HD3 with any layout pattern.
• You can configure the placement patterns for front presence and rear presence speakers separately (p.122).
Front Height/Rear Height
Install the presence speakers on the front/rear side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom sound
spaces, and sound extensity effectively.
X
Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker unit
may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled
speakers.
Notes on installation of ceiling speakers
When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, use the following illustration as a reference.
When using two presence speakers
Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of front and
rear sound spaces effectively.
Installation position
Just above the listening position, or the ceiling between extensions of front speakers and
Y
listening position
For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers” (p.26).
En
26
When using four presence speakers
Installation position
Front presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position
Rear presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the listening position and surround (or surround back)
speakers
Caution
Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.
En
27
Input/output jacks and cables
The unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Prepare the cables that match the jacks on your devices.
■ Video/audio jacks
■ Video jacks
■ Audio jacks
To input/output video and audio signals, use the following
To input only video signals, use the following jacks.
To input/output only audio signals, use the following jacks.
jacks.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
HDMI jacks
OPTICAL jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three components:
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable.
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
luminance (Y), chrominance blue (Pb), and chrominance red
Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable.
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
(Pr). Use a component video cable with three plugs.
Digital optical cable
Component video cable
HDMI cable
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
NENT
COMPO
Y
PB
VIDEO
PR
A AV 1 )
IE
(1 MOV
COAXIAL jacks
Y
Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using as
short a cable as possible to prevent signal quality degradation.
X
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable.
VIDEO jacks
Digital coaxial cable
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel
(ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features.
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
Video pin cable
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
VIDEO
AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable
(RCA cable).
AUDIO3
En
28
Stereo pin cable
XLR jacks
Transmit analog audio signals. Use an XLR balanced cable.
XLR input jacks
Match the pins and insert the “male” connector of the XLR
balanced cable until you hear a click.
XLR balanced cable (male)
IO
AUD
4
R
X
When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the PUSH button
on the unit and then pull the connector out.
XLR output jacks
Match the pins and insert the “female” connector of the XLR
balanced cable until you hear a click.
XLR balanced cable (female)
T
OU
E
PR TER
N
CE
X
When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the lever of the
connector and then pull it out.
About the XLR jacks
• The pin assignments for the XLR jacks of the unit are shown
below. Before connecting an XLR balanced cable, refer to the
instruction manual of your device and verify that its XLR jacks
are compatible with the pin assignments.
XLR input jacks
2. HOT
1. GND
3. COLD
XLR output jacks
1. GND
2. HOT
3. COLD
En
29
2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers
■ Balanced connection
Connect the power amplifier and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
Depending on the speaker system you want to use, connect the corresponding PRE OUT (XLR)
Connecting a power amplifier
jacks of the unit to the amplifier with XLR balanced cables.
Connect the input jacks of your power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit so that the
Y
• Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your power amplifier and verify that
audio source selected on the unit can be output to the power amplifier for playback.
its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.29).
Select a balanced (XLR) or an unbalanced (RCA) connection for each channel depending on the
• We recommend using a power amplifier with volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit).
input jacks available on your power amplifier.
The unit (rear)
2
SUBWOOFER
X
R
COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
CENTER
(REAR)
2
L (FRONT) 1
REAR
PRESENCE
ANTENNA
75ȍ
The XLR jacks and RCA jacks for each channel output the same signals.
L
R REAR
PRESENCE
R FRONT
PRESENCE
FM
R SURROUND
BACK
AM
(2 RADIO)
R SURROUND
R FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
L FRONT
L SURROUND
L SURROUND
BACK
L FRONT
PRESENCE
L REAR
PRESENCE
Caution
To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure you remove the power cable
of the unit and turn off the power amplifier before making connections.
PRE OUT
(XLR) jacks
Power amplifier
XLR
Speaker
connections
(Female connector)
XLR
(Male connector)
Main input (XLR)
En
30
Connecting subwoofers
■ Unbalanced connection
Depending on the speaker system you want to use, connect the corresponding PRE OUT (RCA)
Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.
jacks of the unit to the amplifier with audio pin cables (RCA unbalanced cables).
Select a balanced (XLR) or an unbalanced (RCA) connection depending on the input jacks
Y
available on your subwoofer.
We recommend using a power amplifier with volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit).
The unit (rear)
X
Power amplifier
• The XLR jacks and RCA jacks output the same signals.
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
AV 4
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
1
(5 STB)
PB
RE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
B AV 2
Y
configure the “Layout (Subwoofer)” setting (p.123) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an
TRIGGER
OUT
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
AV 7
Main input (RCA)
IN
2
PRE OUT
(FRONT)
AC wall outlet.
Speaker
connections
PR
ZONE OUT
1
2
Caution
R
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure you remove the power cable
of the unit and turn off the subwoofer before making connections.
REAR
PRESENCE
ANTENNA
75ȍ
ONT
ESENCE
FM
R SURROUND
BACK
AM
(2 RADIO)
R SURROUND
R FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
L FRONT
L
PRE OUT
(RCA) jacks
■ Balanced connection
Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the SUBWOOFER PREOUT (XLR) 1–2 jacks
of the unit with XLR balanced cables.
Y
Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your subwoofer and verify that its XLR
jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.29).
REMOTE
IN
The unit (rear)
RS-232C
OUT
XLR input
A
XLR input
SUBWOOFER
R
(REAR)
L (FRONT) 1
2
9
EAR
SENCE
L SURROUND
SURROUND
L BACK
R
2
(REAR)
FRONT
L PRESENCE
9
REAR
L PRESENCE
SUBWOOFER
L (FRONT) 1
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
SUBWOOFER PREOUT
(XLR) 1–2 jacks
(Male connector)
(Female connector)
En
31
■ Unbalanced connection
Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the SUBWOOFER PREOUT (RCA) 1–2 jacks
of the unit with audio pin cables (RCA unbalanced cables).
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
T
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
AV 4
AV 5
1
ARC
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
9
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
PB
PR
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
9
B AV 2
(5 STB)
Y
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
(FRONT)
1
2
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
ANTENNA
75ȍ
R FRONT
PRESENCE
FM
R SURROUND
BACK
AM
(2 RADIO)
R SURROUND
R FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
En
32
3 Connecting a TV and playback devices
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices.
X
Connecting a TV
• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power
and volume with the TV’s remote control.
■ HDMI connection
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin
on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.172).
cable).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
Y
• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.34).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
HDMI OUT jack
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
The unit
(rear)
2
1
ARC
HDMI
HDMI OUT
AV 1
(HDCP2.2)
2
AV 1
CENTER
AV 2
(1 MOVIE)
A
1
ARC
MULTI CH INPUT
L
AV 2
(5 STB)
(1 MOVIE)
AV 3
(5 STB)
AV 4
(6 GAME)
PB
A
PR
(1
R
PHONO
L
HDMI input
(6 G
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
HDMI
B
SURROUND
AUDIO 1
SUR BACK
AUDIO 2
(7 TV)
(3 MUSIC)
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
Y
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO 3
PB
PR
HDMI
ZONE OUT
R
AUDIO
AUDIO 1
GND
(7 TV)
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2
6 OPTICAL
75ȍ
ZONE 3
FM
FRONT
L
A
L
AUDIO 4
R
L
R REAR
PRESENCE
L
R FRONT
PRESENCE
R SURROUND
BACK
R SUR
R
R
R
TV
1 OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
O
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
En
33
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
If a second TV or projector is connected to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, you can use the remote control
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the
to switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching video (p.63). In addition, a TV, etc.,
unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of
placed in Zone 2 can be connected to the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack on the unit (p.101).
the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI OUT 3 jack
an HDMI output jack.
HDMI OUT
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
Y
(HDCP2.2)
2
3
1
(ZONE OUT)
ARC
The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting
HDMI
HDMI
(p.142) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A, B), COAXIAL (3, 4, 5)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
AV 1
(HDCP2.2)
2
AV 1
CENTER
(1 MOVIE)
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
(HDCP2.2)
AV 2
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
and OPTICAL (1, 2, 6) jacks to another input source.
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
3
(1 MOVIE)
AV 4
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
A AV 1
(ZONE OUT)
X
TRIGGER
OUT
(1 MOVIE)
1
R
B AV 2
(5 STB)
PHONO
HDMI OUT
AV 7
1
ARC
MULTI CH INPUT
L
AV 2
NETWORK
SURROUND
AUDIO 1
SUR BACK
AUDIO 2
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO 3
The unit (rear)
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
RS-232C
OUT
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be
2
determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.112) in the “Option” menu.
TV (already connected)
HDMI input
HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
MI OUT
CP2.2)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
HDM
AV 7
(HD
1
ARC
AV 2
STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
(ZON
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
TRIGGER
OUT
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
1
TV
Projector
TV
(5 STB)
Y
Zone 2/4
PB
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
B AV 2
OU
IN
HDMI output
2
PR
HDMI
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
(FRONT)
1
HDMI
Y
2
R
COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
(RE
REAR
PRESENCE
HDMI
ANTENNA
75ȍ
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 and 3 jack.
• You can connect a video monitor in Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 3 jack in order to enjoy video and audio.
NCE
R FRONT
PRESENCE
FM
R SURROUND
BACK
AM
(2 RADIO)
R SURROUND
R FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
L FRONT
L SUR
The zone to be used can be selected with “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu.
Video device
En
34
■ Component video connection
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial,
coaxial or stereo pin cable).
digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the
audio output jacks available on your video device.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video
Output jacks on video device
Audio
Input jacks on the unit
Digital coaxial
AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
Video
Audio
Component video
Digital coaxial
Composite video
AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
The unit (rear)
Y
PB
PR
AV 1
(HDCP2.2)
AV 2
AV 3
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
AV 4
AV 5
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
2
1
Y
PB
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
MULTI CH INPUT
PR
Y
PB
Video output
(component video)
(5 STB)
PHONO
(7 TV)
L
Y
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO 3
PB
PR
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
(3 MUSIC)
(FRONT)
1
PHONO
2
PR
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 3
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FM
AM
Y
PB
AV 2
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
C
Y
PR
SURROUND
AUDIO 1
SUR BACK
AUDIO 2
(7 TV)
(3 MUSIC)
Video output
(composite video)
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
V
Y
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO 3
ZON
VIDEO
R
CENTER
ANTENNA
75ȍ
(1 MOVIE)
R
L
R
AV 1
CENTER
L
B AV 2
SUR BACK
AUDIO 2
(1 MOVIE)
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
SURROUND
AUDIO 1
AV 1-4 (VIDEO)
jacks
AV 1
(HDCP2.2)
(1 MOVIE)
ARC
CENTER
L
AV 1-4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
AV 6
1
ARC
AV 2
AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT
2
AV 1
Digital optical
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
MULTI CH INPUT
AV 1-2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
PB
(2 RADIO)
GND
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
V
ZONE 2
6 OPTICAL
75ȍ
Y
AUDIO 4
R
L
R REAR
PRESENCE
R SURROUND
R FRONT
BACK
PRESENCE
R SURROUND
R FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
AUDIO 4
R
C
L
R REAR
PRESENCE
R SU
R FRONT
BA
PRESENCE
C
C
COAXIAL
L
COAXIAL
O
L
C
Video device
L
L
R
R
Video device
O
R
L
L
R
R
OPTICAL
R
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL) or
AV 1-2 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital coaxial or analog stereo)
Any of AV 1-2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1-4 (AUDIO) jacks
X
To connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and a digital optical cable, use “Input
Assignment” (p.142) in the “Setup” menu to assign the COMPONENT VIDEO and OPTICAL jacks to the same input
source.
En
35
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Audio output
(PHONO)
PHONO jacks
PHONO
PHONO
Connect audio devices such as CD players and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio
L
L
output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections.
L
Y
L
R
R
R
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
Ground lead
GND
setting (p.142) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (3, 4, 5) and OPTICAL (1, 2,
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
6) jacks to another input source.
MULTI CH INPUT
AV 1
CENTER
(1 MOVIE)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
GND
A
1
ARC
L
R
The unit (rear)
AV 2
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
(6 G
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
A
PR
(
• Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your audio device and verify that its
R
XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.29).
PHONO
L
Turntable
B
SURROUND
AUDIO 1
SUR BACK
AUDIO 2
(7 TV)
(3 MUSIC)
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
Y
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO 3
PB
C
PR
C
ZONE OUT
COAXIAL
X
R
O
GND
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be
Digital optical
Analog stereo (RCA)
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
FM
O
FRONT
A
L
AUDIO 4
R
Digital coaxial
4 COAXIAL
75ȍ
determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.112) in the “Option” menu.
Audio output jacks on audio device
3 COAXIAL
L
R REAR
PRESENCE
R FRONT
PRESENCE
R SURROUND
BACK
R SUR
L
L
R
R
R
Audio input jacks on the unit
OPTICAL
Audio device
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
AV 3 (OPTICAL)
XLR
AUDIO 1-2 (OPTICAL)
AV 1–4 (AUDIO [RCA])
AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR])
Turntable (PHONO)
PHONO
XLR
Analog stereo (XLR)
XLR
AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO [RCA])
XLR
Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 (COAXIAL,
OPTICAL, AUDIO [RCA], AUDIO [XLR])
jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
En
36
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
The AUX jacks are convenient for temporarily connecting an audio playback device.
Use stereo pin cables to connect an audio device (such as a CD player) to the unit.
For details on connecting a USB device to the USB jack, see “Connecting a USB storage device”
(p.86).
X
Before making connections, stop playback on the device, and turn down the volume of the unit sufficiently.
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
HELP
AUX
PHONES
USB
5V
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
L
L
AUDIO
R
R
The unit (front)
Audio device
En
37
4 Connecting the radio antennas
Connect the supplied radio antenna to the unit.
Connecting the AM antenna
Hold down
Insert
Release
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)
X
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
FM antenna
AM antenna
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
AV 1
CENTER
L
(1 MOVIE)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.
1
ARC
MULTI CH INPUT
AV 2
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
TRIGGER
OUT
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
1
R
L
SURROUND
AUDIO 1
SUR BACK
AUDIO 2
(7 TV)
(3 MUSIC)
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
Y
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO 3
PB
DAB/FM antenna
R
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
B AV 2
(5 STB)
PHONO
DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East
and Russia models only)
IN
2
PR
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
(FRONT)
R
1
2
GND
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
ANTENNA
75ȍ
AUDIO 4
R
L
R REAR
PRESENCE
R FRONT
PRESENCE
FM
R SURROUND
BACK
AM
(2 RADIO)
R SURROUND
R FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
The unit (rear)
L FRONT
MULTI CH INPUT
AV 1
CENTER
L
(1 MOVIE)
AV 2
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
TRIGGER
OUT
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
1
R
(5 STB)
PHONO
L
The unit (rear)
SURROUND
AUDIO 1
SUR BACK
AUDIO 2
(7 TV)
(3 MUSIC)
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
Y
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO 3
PB
RE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
B AV 2
IN
2
PR
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
(FRONT)
R
1
2
R
GND
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
75ȍ
Assembling the AM antenna
AUDIO 4
R
L
R REAR
PRESENCE
R FRONT
PRESENCE
ZONE 3
FM
R SURROUND
BACK
FRONT
SURROUND
AM
DAB/FM
75ȍ
SURROUND
BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
(2RADIO)
RADIO)
(2
R SURROUND
R FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
L FRONT
Y
• The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.
En
38
5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless
Y
antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may
block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network
software or firewall settings appropriately.
Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Connecting the network cable
Preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or
higher straight cable).
If you want to establish a wireless network connection and Bluetooth connection, stand the
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
wireless antenna up straight.
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to
a network device wirelessly” (p.56).
WAN
LAN
Modem
PC
Network cable
The unit (rear)
Router
AV 6
HDMI OUT
AV 7
(HDCP2.2)
NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
3
(ZONE OUT)
AC IN
Mobile device
TRIGGER
OUT
1
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
REMOTE
IN
RS-232C
OUT
Y
2
Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.
X
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network
Connection” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as
the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure
the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters
manually (p.136).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information” (p.125) in the “Network” menu.
En
39
6 Connecting other devices
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger
function
Connections with other devices are as shown below.
Connecting a device with analog multichannel output
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such
You can connect an analog multichannel output device such as a DVD player and an SACD
as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a power amplifier or a Yamaha subwoofer
player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger
X
function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural
mini-plug cable.
The front channel output should be connected to the AUDIO 3 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit.
MULTI CH INPUT
jacks
The unit (rear)
AV 1
(HDCP2.2)
2
AV 1
CENTER
L
(1 MOVIE)
Channel output
(Center)
MULTI CH INPUT
HDMI OUT
MULTI CH INPUT
L
AV 2
(1 MOV
AV 3
(5 STB)
CENTER
1
ARC
(6 GAME)
TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
The unit (rear)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
PHONO
SUR BACK
AUDIO 2
(7 TV)
L
AV 7
3
(Subwoofer)
1
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
2
(FRONT)
(3 MUSIC)
SUR BACK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
(HDCP2.2)
(ZONE OUT)
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO 3
SURROUND
HDMI OUT
TRIGGER
OUT
1
SURROUND
AUDIO 1
Power amplifier
TRIGGER
OUT
NETWORK
DMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 4
R
R
Trigger In
(+12V)
1
SUBWOOFER
R
2
SUBWOOFER
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
L
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
R
L
R REAR
PRESENCE
(Surround
back)
R
SURROUND
BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
(REAR)
2
L (FRONT) 1
REAR
PRESENCE
NNA
DIO)
R FRONT
R FRONT
PRESENCE
PRE OUT
CENTER
L FRONT
L SURROUND
L SURROUND
BACK
L FRONT
PRESENC
R
L
(Surround)
Device with analog
multichannel output
System
connector
jack
R
AUDIO 3
(AUDIO) jacks
L
(Front)
Yamaha
subwoofer
X
R
X
You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.145) in the “Setup”
menu.
• You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using “Video
Out” (p.113) in the “Option” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.
• Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing
speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker
configuration.
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are not
available.
En
40
7 Connecting the power cable
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then
to an AC wall outlet.
The unit (rear)
DMI OUT
HDCP2.2)
NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
3
ZONE OUT)
AC IN
OTE
RS-232C
To an AC wall outlet
OUT
SUBWOOFER
(REAR)
2
SURROUND
L (FRONT) 1
L SURROUND
BACK
L FRONT
PRESENCE
L REAR
PRESENCE
En
41
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English, Japanese,
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.
HDMI OUT
1
2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NET
GREEN
BLUE
Cursor keys
ENTER
HOME
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
YELLOW
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
SETUP
TOP
MENU
ENTER.
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
X
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press
from the unit.
INPUT
TUNER
5
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
3
4
Press SETUP.
6
Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.
7
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Use the cursor keys to select “System” and press ENTER.
RETURN
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
X
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
En
42
9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings
If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings
HDMI OUT
6
manually before performing YPAO.
SCENE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NET
YELLOW
BLUE
SETUP
1
2
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
If you are using the rear presence speakers, also select its layout
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
3
4
5
in “Rear Presence”.
7
X
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
RETURN
“Layout” (p.122), then select your front presence speaker layout.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
• When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X
playback, select “Configuration” ! “Front Presence” !
BLUETOOTH
USB
GREEN
“Layout” (p.122), then select “Front”.
• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback (p.26)
PRESET
RED
(Virtual CINEMA FRONT), select “Configuration” ! “Surround” !
CINEMA FRONT) (p.24)
INPUT
TUNER
• When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system
• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual
1
Configure the corresponding speaker settings.
Press SETUP.
Use the cursor keys to select “Speaker” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Configuration” and press
ENTER.
TUNING
En
43
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NET
GREEN
connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
X
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
X
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the
tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed
BLUETOOTH
YPAO MIC
jack
for acoustic perfection.
PRESET
RED
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and
settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your
The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
USB
5
listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker
room.
INPUT
TUNER
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your
HDMI OUT
YELLOW
The unit (front)
Y
BLUE
YPAO MIC
Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.
E
R
– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
1
– Keep the room as quiet as possible.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
RETURN
– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become
an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
9
– Do not connect headphones.
1
2
3
2
3
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
4
Turn on the power amplifier.
YPAO
5
microphone
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
Ear height
from the unit.
X
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
The following screen appears on the TV.
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
4
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the
crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
9
MAX
X
To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the
measurement.
En
44
6
Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Measure” (p.46) or
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
If desired, select the measuring options.
“Angle/Height Measure” (p.47) and press ENTER.
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
SCENE
measurement.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
When “Measuring option” is set to “Multi Measure”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions” (p.50)
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
When “Measuring option” is not set to “Multi Measure”:
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.47)
BLUE
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
En
45
Multi Measure
Single measure
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Selects multi measure or single measure.
a
d
e
bac
Measuring method
Checked
Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others
to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different
positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area
defined by those positions (multi measure).
Unchecked (default)
Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the
measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit
that position (single measure).
X
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a
wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated
most frequently.
En
46
Multi measure
(1 listening position +
front/back/left/right)
Multi measure
(2 listening positions +
front/back)
b
c a e
d
c
a b
d
Angle/Height Measure
Enables/disables the angle/height measurement.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
Follow the procedure below to take a measurement when the “Multi
HDMI OUT
Measure” box is unchecked. It takes about 5 minutes to perform the
SCENE
measurement.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Y
• If any error message (such as ERROR 1) or warning message (such as WARNING 1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.54) or “Warning messages” (p.55).
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV.
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
YELLOW
Measuring method
BLUE
Checked
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
RETURN
Unchecked
(default)
Enables the angle/height measurement. The unit will
measure angle of each speaker and height of the presence
speakers at the listening position, and correct the speaker
parameters so that CINEMA DSP can create more effective
sound fields.
Disables the angle/height measurement.
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Start” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
start the measurement immediately.
X
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN or VOLUME keys.
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
finishes.
VOLUME
(when angle/height measurement is disabled)
ENHANCER
Proceed to Step 3.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
1
BAND
TUNING
En
47
(when angle/height measurement is enabled)
Proceed to Step 2.
2
Place the microphone base at the listening position and set the
YPAO microphone to the position “1”.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
Microphone
base
INPUT
BLUETOOTH
USB
2
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
Perform the angle/height measurement.
1
Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Y
AI
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
Microphone base
ENHANCER
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
3
Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
4
In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
En
48
5
Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.
4
To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys to
select “Save” and press ENTER.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
INPUT
The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
BLUE
X
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “Cancel”.
Cursor keys
ENTER
5
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Caution
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
After confirming the result, press RETURN to return to the
MEMORY
BAND
To check the measurement results, use the cursor keys to
select “Measurement result” and press ENTER.
STRAIGHT
TUNING
3
TUNING
“Measurement Finished” screen.
X
For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.53).
En
49
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Follow the procedure below to take a measurement when the “Multi
Measure” box is checked. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the
listening positions.
following screen appears automatically.
Y
(when angle/height measurement is disabled)
• If any error message (such as ERROR 1) or warning message (such as WARNING 1)
NET
Proceed to Step 5.
appears, see “Error messages” (p.54) or “Warning messages” (p.55).
INPUT
TUNER
When the measurements at the positions you want to
measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select
“Skip” and press ENTER.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
3
• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV.
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
1
BLUE
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Start” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
start the measurement immediately.
X
RETURN
(when angle/height measurement is enabled)
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN or VOLUME keys.
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
the first position finishes.
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
2
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position
and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to
8) have been taken.
En
50
Proceed to Step 4.
4
1
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
3
Perform the angle/height measurement.
Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.
Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
INPUT
BLUETOOTH
USB
Microphone base
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
2
Place the microphone base at the listening position you will be
4
position “1”.
5
ENTER
In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the
Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
Microphone
base
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.
TUNING
Y
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.
En
51
5
To check the measurement results, use the cursor keys to
select “Measurement result” and press ENTER.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
X
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.53).
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to
select “Save” and press ENTER.
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
Cursor keys
ENTER
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
TOP
MENU
HOME
X
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “Cancel”.
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
7
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
En
52
Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
Height
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
1
HDMI OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• “Angle (horizontal)” and “Height” show the results when angle/height
measurement is performed.
You can also select “YPAO Result” (p.125) from “Speaker” (p.121) in the “Setup”
GREEN
settings and connections.
3
The following screen appears.
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
RED
• If there are speakers that cannot be detected, check the power amplifier
menu, which displays the previous measurement results.
USB
YELLOW
Height of the presence speakers above the level of the
listening position
X
X
INPUT
NET
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Measurement result” and press ENTER.
SCENE
TUNER
Angle
Horizontal angle of each speaker at the listening position
(horizontal)
To finish checking the results and return to the previous
screen, press RETURN.
BLUE
SETUP
a
b
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
c
RETURN
a Measurement result items
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
c The number of measured positions (when multi measure is
performed)
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
BAND
TUNING
2
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and
reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
1
b Measurement result details
VOLUME
ENHANCER
TUNING
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker” and then “YPAO
Result” (p.125).
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press
ENTER.
Polarity of each speaker
Wiring
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Size
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance
Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level
Output level adjustment for each speaker
En
53
3
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Error messages
Error message
Remedy
ERROR 1
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform
Front speakers are not
detected.
YPAO again.
ERROR 2
One of the surround speakers
cannot be detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and
power amplifier, and then check the power amplifier connections (to
the unit or to the corresponding speakers).
ERROR 3
(This error message will be also displayed if you perform YPAO when the
power amplifier is turned off.)
One of the front presence
speakers cannot be detected.
ERROR 4
One of the surround back
speakers cannot be detected.
ERROR 5
The noise is too loud.
ERROR 6
Surround back speakers are
connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
ERROR 7
The YPAO microphone has
been removed.
ERROR 8
The YPAO microphone cannot
detect test tones.
ERROR 9
Canceled by user operation
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If you select “Proceed”, YPAO takes the
measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back
speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the
unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect the speakers.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow
the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow
the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error
occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To
cancel the measurement, select “Quit”.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit.
If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha
An internal error has occurred. dealer or service center.
ERROR 10
ERROR 11
One of the rear presence
speakers cannot be detected.
En
54
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and
power amplifier, and then check the power amplifier connections (to
the unit or to the rear presence speakers).
Warning messages
Warning message
Remedy
Select “Wiring” in “Measurement result” (p.53) and check the cable
connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”.
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement
results by following on-screen instructions.
WARNING 1
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal
A speaker cable may be
connected with the reverse
polarity (+/-).
speaker settings.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit and power amplifier and then reconnect the speaker
cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message
may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case,
you can ignore the message.
WARNING 2
A speaker is placed more than
24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
WARNING 3
There are significant volume
differences between the
speakers.
En
55
Select “Distance” in “Measurement result” (p.53) and move the speaker
identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening
position.
Turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then install the
corresponding speaker within 24 m of the listening position.
Select “Level” in “Measurement result” (p.53) and check the speaker
identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage environment and
cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the
subwoofer. If there is a problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power
amplifier, and then correct the connections and arrangement of the
speakers. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with
specifications that are as similar as possible.
11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.
Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the
unit.
Internet
Wireless router
Modem
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
The unit
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.57).
En
56
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
Select a connection method according to your environment.
4
5
HDMI OUT
Use the cursor keys to select “Network”.
Use the cursor keys to select “Network Connection” and
press ENTER.
• Using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.62)
SCENE
1
2
3
• Sharing the iOS device setting (p.57)
4
6
• Using the WPS push button configuration (p.58)
5
6
TUNER
NET
7
8
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)”
and select “OK”.
• Using other connection methods (p.59)
INPUT
BLUETOOTH
USB
■ Sharing the iOS device setting
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
You can easily set up a wireless connection by applying the connection
BLUE
SETUP
settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
wireless router.
Y
X
If you set up a wireless connection with this method, the following settings will be
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
initialized.
7
– Network settings
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
– Bluetooth settings
Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.
– USB and network items registered as shortcuts
ENHANCER
– Internet radio stations register to “Favorites”
– Account information for the network services
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
X
• You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later. (The following procedure is a setup example
for iOS 8.)
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1
2
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Y
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check “Share Wi-Fi
Press SETUP.
En
57
8
After checking the on-screen message, use the cursor
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS
keys and ENTER to select “NEXT”.
button.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
Y
HDMI OUT
This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1
2
INPUT
TUNER
NET
■ Using the WPS push button configuration
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
9
BLUE
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display.
On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in
3
the Wi-Fi screen.
Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
Cursor keys
ENTER
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the front display.
TOP
MENU
HOME
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
connection method.
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
The name of the unit
ENHANCER
10 Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
Tap here to start setup
The network currently selected
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to
the selected network (access point).
En
58
About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.
■ Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
Y
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
YELLOW
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
BLUE
Cursor keys
ENTER
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
The following connection methods are available.
unit via HDMI.
SETUP
HOME
connection method and select “NEXT”.
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
INPUT
TOP
MENU
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select the desired
wireless network settings.
1
2
SCENE
1
configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the
7
3
4
5
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button
while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions
displayed on the TV screen.
Use the cursor keys to select “Network” and press ENTER.
Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.57).
Use the cursor keys to select “Network Connection” and
Access Point Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an
access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an
access point” (p.60).
Press SETUP.
press ENTER.
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
6
ENHANCER
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)”
Manual Setting
and select “OK”.
STRAIGHT
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the
required information (such as SSID) manually.
For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless
connection manually” (p.60).
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
PIN Code
X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
En
59
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s
PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The
method is available if the wireless router (access point)
supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings,
see “Using the PIN code” (p.61).
Searching for an access point
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless
starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available
connection setting screen appears on the TV.
access points appears on the TV screen.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
1
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
security key for your network.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
1
access point and select “NEXT”.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the
access point and select “NEXT”.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
INPUT
TUNER
NET
2
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
and select “NEXT”.
BLUE
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
2
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the security
method of the access point and select “NEXT”.
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
3
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press
ENTER to start the connection process.
STRAIGHT
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
the TV screen.
TUNING
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
connection method.
4
Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
En
60
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available
and select “NEXT”.
access points appears on the TV screen.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
Using the PIN code
If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
to Step 4.
SCENE
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26
1
2
3
4
hexadecimal digits.
5
6
7
8
If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or
TUNER
NET
access point and select “NEXT”.
2
BLUETOOTH
USB
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
64 hexadecimal digits.
INPUT
1
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point).
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
BLUE
wireless router (access point).
SETUP
3
Cursor keys
ENTER
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press
ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
4
the TV screen.
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
ENTER to start the connection process.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
connection method.
VOLUME
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
ENHANCER
the TV screen.
STRAIGHT
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.
TUNING
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
En
61
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
12 Connecting to the MusicCast network
MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha,
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
allowing you to share music among all of your rooms with a variety of
HDMI OUT
devices. You can enjoy music from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and
SCENE
music streaming service anywhere in your house with one easy-to-use
1
2
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on
1
2
3
4
application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast compatible
your mobile device and tap “Setup”.
5
6
7
8
products, visit the Yamaha website.
X
• Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
BLUETOOTH
USB
• Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the
network, tap “Settings” and then “Add New Device”.
dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
room and play them back simultaneously.
3
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
following the on screen instructions, then hold down
CONNECT on the front panel of the unit for 5 seconds.
• Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music
streaming services may differ depending on your region and product.)
MusicCast CONTROLLER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
CONNECT
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
4
ENHANCER
MEMORY
need the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the
TUNING
BAND
following the onscreen instructions to set up the network.
To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you
STRAIGHT
TUNING
operation. Search for the free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
5
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application to
playback.
the App Store or Google Play and install it to your device.
Y
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network
Follow the procedure below to add the unit to the MusicCast network.
You can also configure the unit’s wireless settings at once.
Y
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When Pure Direct is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB
cannot be delivered.
• If you configure the unit’s wireless settings with this method, the Wireless LAN
indicator of the front display lights up when the unit is connecting to a network (even
if a wired connection is used).
• You can interlock the power of MusicCast devices with the power of the unit
• The SSID and security key for your network will be needed.
(MusicCast master). For details, see “MusicCast Link Power Interlock” (p.138) in the
• If your router supports multiple SSID’s (network names), connect the mobile device
to the first access point (“SSID 1”, etc.).
En
62
“Setup” menu.
PLAYBACK
MAIN/ZONE
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
HDMI OUT
Basic playback procedure
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD
player) connected to the unit.
1
INPUT
Input selection keys
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
2
3
Selecting an HDMI output jack
Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for
signal output changes.
Start playback on the external device or select a radio
HDMI OUT Sel.
OUT 1+2
station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
OUT 1+2
pages.
TOP
MENU
HOME
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
Russia models only) (p.75)
ENHANCER
• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
MUTE
STRAIGHT
Russia models only) (p.81)
MEMORY
TUNING
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
BAND
Off
• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
VOLUME
TUNING
Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
X
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.64).
• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.85)
supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.86)
connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack,
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.90)
the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• When the MAIN/ZONE switch on the remote control is set to “ZONE2” or “ZONE4”,
• Listening to Internet radio (p.94)
pressing the HDMI OUT key can enable (OUT 3) or disable (OFF) the HDMI OUT3 jack
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.97)
4
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and
HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
OUT 2
East and Russia models) (p.72)
AI
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
OUT 1
• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
VOL.
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
X
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu.
En
63
output.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
You can use up to 8 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch
SCENE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SCENE
1
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
1
2
3
4
Input
AV1
AV2
AV3
AV4
SCENE
5
6
7
8
Input
AV5
AV6
AV7
AV1
YELLOW
Press numbered key (1 to 8), and then the input source
and settings registered to the corresponding scene are
directly selected. The unit turns on automatically when it
is in standby mode.
Alternatively, you can also select a registered scene by
pressing SCENE repeatedly.
INPUT
NET
SCENE
them depending on a playback source.
1
TUNER
Zone4
sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
BLUE
X
• You can check the detailed settings of each scene from the “Scene Setting” screen
(p.131) in the “Setup” menu.
The SCENE name appears on the front display and on the TV.
ENTER
2
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
RETURN
• You can also register and recall SCENE 1-4 with the SCENE key on the unit’s front
panel.
To select a desired SCENE name, press ENTER.
Y
Registering a scene
• To cancel the operation of selecting a registered scene, press RETURN.
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
• The operation is canceled automatically when you have not operated the unit
VOLUME
for the 30 seconds.
ENHANCER
1
Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and
sound program) that you want to assign to a scene.
By default, the following input settings are registered for each scene.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
2
Main Zone, Zone2 and Zone3
SCENE
1
2
3
4
Input
AV1
TUNER
AUDIO2
NET RADIO
SCENE
5
6
7
8
Input
AV2
AV3
AUDIO 1
SERVER
Hold down the desired numbered key (1-8) until “SET
Complete (Setting Complete)” appears on the front
display and on the TV.
SCENE1
SET Complete
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
X
• You can configure more detailed scene assignments in “Scene Setting” in the “Setup”
menu. For details, see “Scene Setting” (p.131).
• You can change the SCENE name displayed on the front display or on the TV. For
details, see “Scene Rename” (p.132).
En
64
Selecting the sound mode
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround
X
decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the
HDMI OUT
sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback).
SCENE
1
2
3
4
Enabling SURROUND:AI.
5
6
7
8
• Press AI.
NET
• You can check which channels are currently outputting sound by looking at the
Channel indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.15) or at the “Information” screen in
This mode lets you enjoy the optimum surround effect according to AI
INPUT
TUNER
“Sound” menu (p.125).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
analysis as well as a compelling sense of realism (p.66).
BLUETOOTH
USB
the “Sound” menu (p.125).
• A sound program or surround decoder cannot be used with the signal from an analog
multichannel input.
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
Selecting a sound program suitable for movies and music
BLUE
• Press PROGRAM repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies and games, as well as for listening to
music sources or for stereo playback.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
PROGRAM
BAND
TUNING
Precaution for enjoying Dolby Atmos®
• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus in
the following situations. (Dolby Atmos PCM format is always decoded as
Dolby Atmos.)
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.
– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).
• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.69) does not work.
Selecting a surround decoder
• Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.70).
Precaution for enjoying DTS:X™
• When DTS:X contents are played back, you can adjust the volume of dialogue
sounds in “DTS Dialogue Control” (p.111) in the “Option” menu.
Switching to the straight decode mode
• When the DTS:X decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as
Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.69) does not work.
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.70).
Enabling Pure Direct
• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.71).
Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and
breadth (p.71).
En
65
Playing back with surround effects
optimized for the scene (SURROUND:AI)
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP HD3)
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
With SURROUND:AI, the AI incorporated in the DSP creates the optimal
HDMI OUT
surround effect for the scene of the content.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
GREEN
YELLOW
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize
such as “dialogue”, “background music”, “ambient sounds” and “sound
Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP HD3). It allows you to
effects” as well as optimized in real time to create a compelling sense of
easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in
realism.
your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.
1
PRESET
RED
Scenes are instantaneously analyzed with a focus on sound elements
BLUE
Sound program category
Press AI.
MUSIC
Each time you press the key, SURROUND:AI is enabled or disabled.
Y
HD 3
• When PURE DIRECT is enabled, SURROUND:AI is not available.
• When SURROUND:AI is enabled, the straight decode mode, PROGRAM key and the
surround decoders are not available.
TOP
MENU
HOME
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, SURROUND:AI is not available.
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SR
Sound program
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up
X
surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front
presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend using front presence
VOLUME
speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence
speakers for further spatial sounds) (p.130).
ENHANCER
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
STRAIGHT
surround speakers to produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front
MEMORY
TUNING
VOL.
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
CLASSICAL
Hall in Vienna
BAND
presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.130).
TUNING
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back
speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using
the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field (p.130).
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, CINEMA DSP is not available.
En
66
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
ENTERTAINMENT
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and
light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices
are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is
realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a
suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games.
The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are
right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic
and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds
depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background
music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more
spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you
were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to
the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that
emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that
reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of
an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic
positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is
relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the
inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of
opera entertainment.
Pavilion
This program reproduces vocals clearly, letting you feel the spaciousness of a
pavilion. Reverberation, which is somewhat delayed, reproduces the live
acoustics unique to a pavilion, and helps to make concert scenes more exciting.
Disco
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a
big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by
high-energy, “immediate” sound.
programs, and games.
MOVIE THEATER
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without
disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio. Its design is
based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions.
It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and
boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds
to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest
Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created
virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects,
and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on
reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space
expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and
powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the
separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie
genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are
modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are
reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the
dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods.
Mono Movie
Enhanced
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an
atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space
with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original
audio.
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the dynamic sound transition
of 3D object audio. Its design is based on the concept of a movie theater with
multi-top speakers, in which the audience is overwhelmed by the natural and
powerful sound effects.
En
67
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
Church in
Royaumont
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a
beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of
Paris.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience
hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly
music and chamber music.
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
Hall in Munich A
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats in
Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for
European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a
calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Munich B
This hall is frequently used for recording orchestral music, and is a shoe-box type
concert hall with around 1,300 seats. The hall is constructed from marble,
resulting in relatively flat resonance. Further, the high ceiling causes sound to
reverberate for longer than usual.
Village Gate
This is the sound field at a jazz club that was in New York. It is in a basement and
has a relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left
of the hall.
Village Vanguard
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling
makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center.
Warehouse Loft
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete
walls clearly with a lot of energy.
Hall in Frankfurt
This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with around 2,400 seats located in
Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The listener’s virtual seat is
in the center-right section on the first floor.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey
atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you
feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.
Hall in Stuttgart
This is a large asymmetrical concert hall with around 2,000 seats located in
downtown Stuttgart. Sound reflected off the concrete wall located to the left of
listeners has a powerful presence.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los
Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox
shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich
sound.
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous
New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
Arena
This program gives you long delays between direct sounds and effect sounds,
with the extraordinarily spacious feel of a large arena.
Hall in Amsterdam
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
Hall in USA A
This is a large 2,600 seat concert hall in the United States which features a fairly
traditional European design. The interior is relatively simple, in the American
style. The middle and high frequencies are richly and beautifully reinforced.
Hall in USA B
This spacious arch-shaped hall has a dome ceiling and can seat 2,600. The ample
resonance apparent in the sound is a feature brought about by longer than
average period of reverberation. In addition to this, the reflector suspended
above the stage allows listeners to experience rich sound from the direction of the
stage.
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output
from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
11ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then
outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field
and is ideal for background music at parties.
The acoustic environment of an ordinary church with moderate
Church in Tokyo
reverberations. The reverberation lasts 2.5 seconds. This is ideal for
Y
reproducing church organ and choral music.
Church in Freiburg
CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.66) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.69) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “11ch Stereo” is
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed
tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling
enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus,
the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of
the church.
En
selected.
68
■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo) when no surround
speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to
reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo
field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to
headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound
enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.
program or a surround decoder.
X
When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you
can place them in the front (p.24) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual
CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the
virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
with the 5 speakers placed in the front.
X
When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
En
69
Enjoying unprocessed playback
PARTY
T
processing.
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo
bDsur
Dolby Surround decoder. Expands the sound using a
method optimized for the layout of the installed
speakers. It produces the extended surround sound
optimized for your speaker system. A real acoustic
space (including overhead) will be created especially
when objectbased audio (such as Dolby Atmos
content) is played.
Neural:X
DTS Neural:X decoder. Expands the sound using a
method optimized for the layout of the installed
speakers. It produces the extended surround sound
optimized for your speaker system. A real acoustic
space (including overhead) will be created especially
when objectbased audio (such as DTS:X content) is
played.
Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.
Neo:6 Music
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
1
BLUE
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled
or disabled.
STRAIGHT
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Y
AI
• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE
speakers are used, select a surround decoder (p.70).
• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
FRONT (p.69) works when multichannel source is played back.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
■ Playing back in extended multichannel
(surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel or multichannel sources.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Auto
produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources.
BLUETOOTH
USB
VOL.
Uses the decoder automatically selected by input
source. The DTS Neural:X decoder is selected for DTS
sources and the Dolby Surround decoder is selected
for other sources.
sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and
INPUT
NET
SUR. DECODE
†‡ Dsur
HDMI OUT
SCENE
TUNER
Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes.
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
1
Y
• When the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder is selected, virtual surround
X
processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.69) does not work.
• We recommend Dolby Surround while network streaming is Dolby contents.
• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and
the selected decode type (p.126).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.166).
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, Surround Decoder is not available.
En
70
• The Neural:X decoder does not work with Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD signals.
Select “Auto” or “bDsur” for these signals.
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(Pure Direct)
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
When Pure Direct is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with
Playing back digitally compressed formats
(such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer)
the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other
SCENE
circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
quality.
1
INPUT
TUNER
NET
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before
Press PURE DIRECT.
it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound
Each time you press the key, Pure Direct is enabled or disabled.
BLUETOOTH
USB
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound,
PURE DIRECT
BLUE
modes.
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
VOL.
L
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when
R
“Hi-Res Mode” (p.111) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default).
Y
When Pure Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Selecting sound programs
1
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is
– Operating the “Setup” menu and “Option” menu
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
enabled or disabled.
– Using the multi-zone function
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
ENHANCER
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
“ENHANCER” lights up
STRAIGHT
Y
MEMORY
BAND
Enhancer On
Hi-Res ENHANCER
VOLUME
ENHANCER
TUNING
Press ENHANCER.
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
TUNING
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
– DSD audio
X
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.111) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, Compressed Music Enhancer is not
available.
En
71
Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio
Setting the frequency steps
stations.
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Y
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used.
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas.
on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1
2
Set the unit to standby mode.
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”.
TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9
4
5
En
72
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
2
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
preset numbers.
X
VOL.
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “FM
Auto Preset” (p.82).
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
GREEN
TUNER
3
PRESET
PRESET
RED
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
FM 87.50MHz
Registering favorite radio stations
(presets)
YELLOW
BLUE
Press TUNING to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations
■ Registering a radio station manually
automatically.
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
FM 98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.73) to
tune into the desired radio station.
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
TOP
MENU
HOME
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
X
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
2
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
• You can switch between “Stereo” and “Monaural” for FM radio reception in “FM
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
Mode” (p.113) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio. For details
number.
see “Video Out” (p.113).
Preset number
TUNING
Preset
BAND
TUNING
STEREO TUNED
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
Preset
STEREO TUNED
En
73
01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
■ Registering radio stations automatically
(FM Auto Preset)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
1
2
3
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
BLUETOOTH
USB
TUNER
YELLOW
Cursor keys
ENTER
4
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Y
■ Clearing preset stations
Y
Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
RETURN
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “Finished” appears at the
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
VOLUME
2
3
4
5
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
BAND
VOL.
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
ENHANCER
TUNING
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED
“Preset” screen and the “Option” menu closes automatically.
AI
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
“No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
TOP
MENU
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Preset
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
keys or PRESET to select a preset number.
OPTION
1
2
station.
To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor
BLUE
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
Press OPTION.
X
PRESET
PRESET
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
■ Selecting a preset station
TUNING
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset”.
Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared
and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next
in-use preset number is displayed.
6
En
74
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
■ Clearing all preset stations
Clear all the radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
1
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
BLUETOOTH
USB
TUNER
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
2
3
4
5
Listening to DAB radio (Australia,
U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia
models only)
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound
and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also
receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations
Press OPTION.
using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which has a more efficient
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear All Preset”.
transmission method.
Y
• The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being
Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.
covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check
WorldDAB online at http://www.worlddab.org/.
If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
X
For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.38).
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
En
75
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
Preparing the DAB tuning
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception
Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to
You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial
perform an initial scan.
scan.
HDMI OUT
1
2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NET
RED
GREEN
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
The following message appears on the front panel if you have not
INPUT
TUNER
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
BLUETOOTH
USB
performed an initial scan yet.
TUNER
Init Scan
Press [ENTER]
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
3
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
available.
• When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.
VOL.
Secondary station
DAB 2
BBC National
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
DAB
BBC Radio 4
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
STRAIGHT
X
You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
MEMORY
BAND
BBC Radio 4
Daily Service
• “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not
VOLUME
ENHANCER
TUNING
Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station.
Y
first DAB radio station as stored in station order.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
DAB
When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the
AI
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
VOL.
Press ENTER to start an initial scan.
Init Scan
>>>------- 30%
1
2
3
X
TUNING
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.113) in the “Option” menu.
• If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1
BAND
TUNING
appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again.
• You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.79).
• To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored,
select “Init Scan” (p.109) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan
again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will
be cleared.
En
76
Registering favorite DAB radio stations
(presets)
■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station
Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have
HDMI OUT
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
SCENE
preset numbers.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
X
You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.
1
2
3
BLUETOOTH
USB
TUNER
PRESET
PRESET
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
OPTION
1
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
■ Clearing preset DAB radio stations
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
Clear DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
number.
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
Preset number
MEMORY
MEMORY
TUNING
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
STRAIGHT
BAND
“No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.
VOLUME
ENHANCER
TUNING
Y
(p.76) to tune into the desired DAB radio station.
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
AI
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception”
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
PRESET:01
Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.
2
HOME
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio
■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
station.
INPUT
RED
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Preset
BAND
01:BBC Radio 4
Preset OK
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
2
3
4
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select a preset DAB radio station to
the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
be cleared and press ENTER.
press MEMORY again.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next
in-use preset number is displayed.
“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)
Preset
02:Empty
BBC Radio 4
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
En
77
5
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
■ Clearing all preset DAB radio stations
Displaying the DAB information
Clear all the DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
1
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
TUNER
PRESET
RED
GREEN
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
YELLOW
BLUE
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
2
3
4
5
Press OPTION.
HOME
1
2
Tune into the desired DAB radio station.
Press INFO on the front panel.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Info
Program Type
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear All Preset”.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the
If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the
displayed item appears.
DAB
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Classic FM
Classic Music
AI
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Information
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
VOL.
Item name
“Option” menu closes automatically.
TOP
MENU
into a DAB radio station.
BAND
TUNING
DLS
(Dynamic Label
Segment)
Information on the current station
Ensemble Label
Ensemble name
Program Type
Station genre
Date And Time
Current date and time
Audio Mode
Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate
CH Label/Freq.
Channel label and frequency
Signal Quality
Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])
DSP Program
Sound mode name
Audio Decoder
Decoder name
X
Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio
station.
En
78
Checking reception strength of each DAB
channel label
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to
HDMI OUT
100 [best]).
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
TUNER
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
1
2
3
4
5
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Tune AID” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select the desired DAB channel
label.
Tune AID
12B Level: 80
RETURN
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
DAB channel label
VOLUME
ENHANCER
6
STRAIGHT
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Reception strength
To exit from the menu, press RETURN.
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
BAND
En
79
■ DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
Frequency
Channel label
Frequency
Channel label
174.928 MHz
5A
225.648 MHz
12B
176.640 MHz
5B
227.360 MHz
12C
178.352 MHz
5C
229.072 MHz
12D
180.064 MHz
5D
230.784 MHz
13A
181.936 MHz
6A
232.496 MHz
13B
183.648 MHz
6B
234.208 MHz
13C
185.360 MHz
6C
235.776 MHz
13D
187.072 MHz
6D
237.488 MHz
13E
188.928 MHz
7A
239.200 MHz
13F
190.640 MHz
7B
192.352 MHz
7C
194.064 MHz
7D
195.936 MHz
8A
197.648 MHz
8B
199.360 MHz
8C
201.072 MHz
8D
202.928 MHz
9A
204.640 MHz
9B
206.352 MHz
9C
208.064 MHz
9D
209.936 MHz
10A
211.648 MHz
10B
213.360 MHz
10C
215.072 MHz
10D
216.928 MHz
11A
218.640 MHz
11B
220.352 MHz
11C
222.064 MHz
11D
223.936 MHz
12A
En
80
Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models
only)
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting
HDMI OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Y
If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the DAB/FM
antennas.
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
Selecting a frequency for reception
from registered radio stations.
SCENE
BLUETOOTH
USB
1
2
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the FM band.
TUNER
FM 87.50MHz
PRESET
YELLOW
VOL.
BLUE
3
Press TUNING to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations
automatically.
TOP
MENU
HOME
FM 98.50MHz
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
STEREO TUNED
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
VOLUME
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
ENHANCER
X
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
• You can switch between “Stereo” and “Monaural” for FM radio reception in “FM
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
Mode” (p.113) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio
station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
BAND
TUNING
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio. For details
see “Video Out” (p.113).
En
81
Registering favorite FM radio stations
(presets)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have
HDMI OUT
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
SCENE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “FM Auto
X
Preset”.
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “FM
Auto Preset” (p.74).
INPUT
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
YELLOW
PRESET
■ Registering a radio station manually
SETUP
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
BLUE
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
1
X
(U.K., Europe, Russia and Middle East models only)
preset numbers.
1
TUNER
■ Registering radio stations automatically
(FM Auto Preset)
1
2
3
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.81) to
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
X
tune into the desired radio station.
To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor
keys or PRESET to select a preset number.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
RETURN
2
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
AI
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
4
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
Y
To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “Finished” appears at the
number.
“Preset” screen and the “Option” menu closes automatically.
Preset number
TUNING
Preset
STEREO TUNED
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
Preset
STEREO TUNED
01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
En
82
■ Selecting a preset station
■ Clearing all preset stations
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
Clear all the radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
1
2
3
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
RED
GREEN
TUNER
YELLOW
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED
BLUE
OPTION
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Y
“No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
1
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
BAND
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
MEMORY
TUNING
TUNING
BAND
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear All Preset”.
Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.
“Option” menu closes automatically.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
2
3
4
5
If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the
■ Clearing preset stations
Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
Preset
PRESET
PRESET
1
Press BAND to select the FM band
station.
INPUT
TUNER
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
3
4
5
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset”.
Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared
and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next
in-use preset number is displayed.
6
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
En
83
Radio Data System tuning
Program Service
Program service name
Program Type
Current program type
Radio Text
Information on the current program
Clock Time
Current time
Type”, “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting
DSP Program
Sound mode name
station.
Audio Decoder
Decoder name
(U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The
unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Y
■ Displaying the Radio Data System information
1
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station
does not provide the Radio Data System service.
Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station.
X
We recommend using “FM Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.82).
2
Press INFO on the front panel.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
STEREO TUNED
Info
Program Type
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Item name
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears.
Frequency (always displayed)
STEREO TUNED
FM 98.50MHz
CLASSICS
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Information
En
84
Playing back music via Bluetooth
You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
smartphones) on the unit.
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the
unit
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and
play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit.
The unit
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)
Y
The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.
• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.138) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
BLUE
Y
• Stand the wireless antenna upright for connecting to a Bluetooth device wirelessly.
1
source.
For details, see “Preparing the wireless antenna” (p.39).
X
For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
2
HOME
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
made.
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
VOLUME
ENHANCER
3
STRAIGHT
BAND
On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is
MEMORY
TUNING
On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of
the unit) from the available device list.
(p.170).
TOP
MENU
Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input
TUNING
Playback operation
keys
displayed on the TV.
X
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically
connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth
connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Bluetooth” (p.138) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.
En
85
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.
Connecting a USB storage device
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format).
X
1
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.170).
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
The unit (front)
SETUP
AI
OPTION
STRAIGHT
(CONNECT)
PROGRAM
ENTER
RETURN
HELP
PHONES
USB
5V
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
USB storage device
USB
Connected
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
X
If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears
in the front display.
Y
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables.
• The unit cannot charge USB devices while it is in standby mode.
En
86
Playback of USB storage device contents
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
displayed.
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
BLUETOOTH
USB
USB
PRESET
GREEN
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
and start playback.
1
INPUT
RED
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents
TV screen.
1
NET
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the
SCENE
TUNER
2
YELLOW
BLUE
X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen,
Cursor keys
ENTER
hold down RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
RETURN
X
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
AI
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
displayed.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.105).
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
TUNING
En
87
■ Browse screen
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
a
b
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
■ Playback screen
HDMI OUT
a
d
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
b
c
INPUT
GREEN
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.89), playback status (such as
play/pause) and elapsed time.
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.89).
PRESET
RED
a Status indicators
a Status indicators
BLUETOOTH
USB
YELLOW
b Contents list
BLUE
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Cursor keys
ENTER
HOME
d Operation menu
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
Menu
AI
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
VOLUME
1 Page Down
ENHANCER
Now Playing
STRAIGHT
BAND
Moves to the playback screen.
10 Pages Up
MEMORY
TUNING
Function
1 Page Up
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
TUNING
Playback operation
keys
Displays the artist name, album name and song title.
X
c Item number/total
Use the cursor keys to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
TOP
MENU
b Playback information
10 Pages Down
X
When “Video Out” in the “Option” menu is set to except “Off”, you can close the browse
screen by pressing the left cursor key. To display the browse screen again, press any
cursor key. For details on see “Video Out” (p.113).
En
88
control to control playback.
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage
device contents.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
1
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OPTION.
2
NET
RED
GREEN
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle/Repeat” and press
ENTER.
INPUT
TUNER
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
BLUETOOTH
USB
X
PRESET
YELLOW
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
BLUE
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
3
“Repeat” (Repeat) and select a setting.
Item
RETURN
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
VOLUME
Setting
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
Function
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
Repeat
(Repeat)
TUNING
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
En
89
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
You can play back music files stored on your media servers on the unit.
Y
■ For a PC or a NAS with other media server software
installed
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.39). You can check whether
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.135) in the
settings.
“Setup” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network
connection.
X
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.170).
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or media servers, first you need to configure the
media sharing setting on each music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
The setting procedure may vary depending on the PC and Windows Media Player version (The
following procedure is a setup example for Windows Media Player 12).
1
2
3
4
5
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name.
Click “OK” to exit.
X
For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
En
90
Playback of PC music contents
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
playback.
displayed.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
INPUT
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input
source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen, hold down
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
RETURN
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
X
during playback, playback stops automatically.
If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
AI
playback screen is displayed.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
2
ENHANCER
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press
ENTER.
STRAIGHT
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.105).
VOLUME
TUNING
En
91
■ Browse screen
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
a
b
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
■ Playback screen
HDMI OUT
a
d
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
b
c
INPUT
a Status indicators
a Status indicators
BLUETOOTH
USB
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.93), playback status (such as
play/pause) and elapsed time.
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.93).
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
b Contents list
BLUE
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER to confirm the selection.
Cursor keys
ENTER
HOME
d Operation menu
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
Menu
AI
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
VOLUME
ENHANCER
Now Playing
MEMORY
BAND
Moves to the playback screen.
10 Pages Up
STRAIGHT
TUNING
Function
1 Page Up
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
TUNING
Playback operation
keys
Displays the artist name, album name and song title.
X
c Item number/total
Use the cursor keys to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
TOP
MENU
b Playback information
10 Pages Down
X
When “Video Out” in the “Option” menu is set to except “Off”, you can close the browse
screen by pressing the left cursor key. To display the browse screen again, press any
cursor key. For details on see “Video Out” (p.113).
En
92
control to control playback.
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
1
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OPTION.
2
NET
RED
GREEN
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle/Repeat” and press
ENTER.
INPUT
TUNER
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press
BLUETOOTH
USB
X
PRESET
YELLOW
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
BLUE
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
3
“Repeat” (Repeat) and select a setting.
Item
RETURN
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
VOLUME
Setting
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
Function
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
Repeat
(Repeat)
TUNING
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
En
93
Listening to Internet radio
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.39). You can check
SCENE
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to
1
2
3
4
the unit in “Information” (p.135) in the “Network” menu.
5
6
7
8
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
NET
GREEN
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input
source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
NET
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
BLUETOOTH
USB
• Folder names are different depending on the language.
PRESET
RED
1
• The unit uses the airable.Radio service. airable is a service of Tune In GmbH.
INPUT
TUNER
Playback of Internet radio
Y
HDMI OUT
YELLOW
BLUE
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
2
RETURN
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
playback screen is displayed.
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.105).
En
94
■ Browse screen
■ Playback screen
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
a
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
a
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
c
b
b
INPUT
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item
and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
a Playback indicator
a Contents list
BLUETOOTH
USB
BLUE
b Item number/total
Displays the station name, album name and song title.
c Operation menu
Cursor keys
ENTER
Use the cursor keys to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
HOME
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
1 Page Down
AI
Now Playing
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
Moves to the playback screen.
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
ENHANCER
10 Pages Down
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
Playback operation
keys
X
When “Video Out” in the “Option” menu is set to except “Off”, you can close the browse
screen by pressing the left cursor key. To display the browse screen again, press any
cursor key. For details on see “Video Out” (p.113).
En
X
• You can use the playback operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Function
1 Page Up
TOP
MENU
Displays the elapsed time.
b Playback information
95
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites)
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Favorites”, you
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
can quickly access to them from the “Favorites” folder in the browse
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
screen.
X
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
You can also register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth input
source as shortcuts (p.105).
INPUT
■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
OPTION
1
screen or start playback of it to display the playback
screen.
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
2
3
Use the cursor key to select “Add to favorites” and press
The selected station is added to the “Favorites” folder.
Radio stations registered to favorites are displayed with “S”.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
BAND
Press OPTION.
ENTER.
VOLUME
ENHANCER
TUNING
Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse
Browse screen
TUNING
X
To remove a station that is registered to favorites, select the station and then select
“Remove from favorites”.
En
96
Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
iTunes
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
PC
(wired or wireless)
1
Router
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen
on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon appears.
iTunes (example)
(wired or wireless)
iOS (example)
The unit
iPhone/iPad/iPod touch
Y
If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
Y
2
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.135) in
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network
name of the unit) as the audio output device.
the “Setup” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect.
3
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
Select a song and start playback.
X
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.170).
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
X
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby”
(p.136) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name”
(p.138) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from
iTunes/iPod, set “AirPlay Volume Interlock” (p.137) in the “Network” menu to “Off”.
Caution
When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could
result in damage to the power amplifier or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback,
stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately.
En
97
■ Playback screen
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
a
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
b
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
INPUT
a Playback indicator
BLUETOOTH
USB
Displays the elapsed/remaining time.
PRESET
YELLOW
b Playback information
BLUE
Displays the artist name, album name and song title.
X
You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
Playback operation
keys
En
98
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the
■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms
unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).
You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can
listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room
Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
(Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).
Video (HDMI)
• Audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in each
zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.172).
Audio (ZONE OUT)
Multi-zone configuration examples
Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we
Guest room
(Zone2)
recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center
about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements.
Living room (main zone)
■ Enjoying music in other rooms
Connections
TV: p.101
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.100
Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Audio (ZONE OUT)
Video/audio (HDMI)
Study room
(Zone2 and/or Zone3)
Kitchen
(Zone2 or Zone4)
Living room (main zone)
Connections
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.100
Living room (main zone)
Connection
TV: p.101
En
99
Preparing the multi zone system
Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting an external amplifier.
■ Connecting speakers to play back audio
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and
connect speakers to the external amplifier.
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
H INPUT
AV 1
CENTER
(1 MOVIE)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
AV 4
ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks
1
ARC
AV 2
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
ZONE OUT
B AV 2
(5 STB)
SUR BACK
AUDIO 2
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO 3
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
(3 MUSIC)
(FR
L
R
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(R
SUB
ANTENNA
75ȍ
FM
AM
(2 RADIO)
ZONE 2
DIO 4
L
R REAR
PRESENCE
R FRONT
PRESENCE
R SURROUND
BACK
R SURROUND
ZONE 3
R FRON
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
L
R
AUDIO
Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
X
You can adjust the volume for Zone2 and Zone3 output with the unit. When using an external amplifier with
volume control, set “Volume” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu to “Fixed”.
En
100
■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2 or
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multichannel playback in another room
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings
(Zone4).
Y
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to the
unit with an HDMI cable (p.34).
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.
• The “Setup” menu and “Option” menu cannot be used with Zone2 or Zone4, but browsing or play back are
possible with a network, USB or Bluetooth connection in Zone2.
HDMI OUT 3
(ZONE OUT) jack
The unit (rear)
(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input
HDMI OUT
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
HDMI OUT
AV 7
(HDCP2.2)
NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
HDMI
(HDCP2.2)
3
3
(ZONE OUT)
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI
HDMI
TRIGGER
OUT
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
(FRONT)
1
2
SUBWOOFER
R
SURROUND
BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
(REAR)
2
L (FRONT) 1
REAR
PRESENCE
ENNA
ADIO)
R FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
L FRONT
L SURROUND
L SURROUND
BACK
L FRONT
PRESE
Zone2 or Zone4
(Example: using an AV amplifier)
HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI
Main zone
Zone4
To assign the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign”
(p.135) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.
En
101
■ Operating the unit from another room
(remote connection)
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support
You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the supplied
remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting
remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT
the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver.
Remote connections between Yamaha products
jacks.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
AV 2
AV 3
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
HDMI OUT
AV 7
AV 2
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
N
AV 4
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
TRIGGER
OUT
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
1
PB
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
2
IN
PR
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
(FRONT)
Infrared signal
receiver
REMOTE
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
(5 STB)
OUT
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
1
2
SUBWOOF
R
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
(REAR)
2
REAR
PRESENCE
ANTENNA
75ȍ
REAR
PRESENCE
IN
3
Y
5 COAXIAL
REMOTE
IN
(ZONE OUT)
B AV 2
AXIAL
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
(HDCP2.2)
1
ARC
VIE)
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
REMOTE
R FRONT
PRESENCE
FM
R SURROUND
BACK
AM
(2 RADIO)
R SURROUND
R FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
L FRONT
L SURROUND
Remote control
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Infrared signal
transmitter
Infrared signal
receiver
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Main zone
En
102
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
MAIN/ZONE
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
ZON
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
Press z (receiver power).
pages.
2
3
4
Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled or
5
6
7
8
disabled.
NET
PRESET
RED
GREEN
indicator lights up in the front display.
BLUETOOTH
USB
YELLOW
BLUE
3
Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see
• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected
for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to
AI
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.86)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.94)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.97)
Y
“SERVER”.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Russia models only) (p.81)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.90)
“Multi-zone output” (p.172).
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.85)
• Audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you
HOME
• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
Russia models only) (p.75)
Y
TOP
MENU
• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models) (p.72)
When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding zone
Input selection keys
TUNER
Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.
Use the ZONE switch to select a zone.
1
INPUT
4
AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in
VOLUME
the main zone.
ENHANCER
X
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
• The Zone2/Zone3 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the
Zone3/Zone3 input.
• To play back DSD audio or signals with a sampling frequency of 352.8 kHz or
384 kHz in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input, or use the party
mode (p.104).
• Depending on the “Remote Key” (p.143) setting in the “System” menu, the
PROGRAM key may be also available in Zone2.
Caution
To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.
En
103
SLEEP
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
PARTY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SCENE
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
The following functions are also available when the zone you want to
The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same music that
operate is enabled.
is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo
Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
party.
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
INPUT
NET
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function
SCENE
TUNER
■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4
YELLOW
BLUE
1
Press PARTY.
Press SCENE 1-8.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off.
X
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front
To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold
display.
down the desired SCENE1-8 key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display.
(Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.)
X
You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode Set” (p.141)
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Setting the sleep timer
in the “Setup” menu.
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
Y
off).
Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone.
AI
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
VOLUME
enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
ENHANCER
Press ENHANCER.
MUTE
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
ENHANCER
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
X
Depending on the “Remote Key” (p.143) setting, the PROGRAM Key may be also
available in Zone2 and Zone3.
En
104
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
HDMI OUT
shortcut numbers.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.
X
• You can also use the “Favorites” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.96).
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
GREEN
• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
NET
USB
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
PRESET
RED
Recalling a registered item
input source as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the
PURE DIRECT
YELLOW
BLUE
contents cannot be registered.
1
2
Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.
Press PRESET to select a desired content.
Recall Preset
01:USB
Registering an item
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Y
• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
TOP
MENU
HOME
1
2
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Memory Preset
01:Empty
VOLUME
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
MEMORY
MEMORY
– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or
To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use PRESET
TUNING
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS, the unit
X
STRAIGHT
BAND
– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the
network.
Shortcut number (flashes)
ENHANCER
TUNING
– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to the
unit.
Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.
AI
• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not recall the music file
correctly. In such cases, register the items again.
keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.
• The registered content (songs and Internet radio stations) can be displayed as a list
Memory Preset
02:Empty
and easily recalled by using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.62) on your mobile device.
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
3
To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
En
105
Viewing the current status
Currently input
source
You can view the current status (input or DSP program currently selected) on the front panel
AV 1-7
display or TV.
AUX
AUDIO 1-4
Item
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*1)
PHONO
Switching information on the front display
1
(AM radio feature is not available on the Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
Russia models)
TUNER (FM/AM)
Press INFO on the front panel to select between the various display items.
Info
Audio Decoder
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*1)
* (U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data
System broadcasting station (p.84).
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
TUNER (DAB)
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only)
See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.78) for details.
Item name
Bluetooth
About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding information appears.
AV1
†‡ Dsur
USB
SERVER
VOL.
AirPlay
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Information
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*1), IP Address (IP address), Ethernet
MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program
(sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*1), IP Address (IP address),
Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)
MusicCast Link
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*1), IP Address
(IP address), Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)
X
Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*1)
to each input source group.
*1
The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is
activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
En
106
Viewing the status information on the TV
1
2
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “On-screen Information”
1
2
3
4
and press ENTER.
5
6
7
8
The following information is displayed on the TV.
TUNER
NET
X
INPUT
When SURROUND:AI is enabled, the status information for SURROUND:AI is also
BLUETOOTH
USB
displayed.
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
Input source/ CINEMA DSP /
Party mode status Enhancer status
Volume/YPAO
Volume status
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
RETURN
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
ENHANCER
Audio format
Decoder
Sound mode
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
3
To close the information display, press RETURN.
Y
• You can use the PROGRAM key on the remote control for displaying the status
information on the TV. For details, see “PROGRAM Key” (p.143).
• Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup”
menu on the TV.
En
107
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen),
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
allowing you to easily configure settings during playback.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
Press OPTION.
Front display
INPUT
TUNER
NET
Option
Tone Control
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1 SW
SR
SBL
SBR
TV screen
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
RETURN
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
2
ENHANCER
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
X
STRAIGHT
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
TUNING
3
4
Use the cursor keys to select a setting.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
En
108
Option menu items
Item
X
112
Video
Adjustment
(Video Adjust)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets.
113
Video Out
(V. Out)
Selects a video to be output with the selected audio
source.
113
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configure the shuffle setting for playback.
-
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configure the repeat setting for playback.
-
FM Mode
(Mode)
Switches between the reception settings for FM radio.
113
FM Auto Preset
(FM Auto Preset)
Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong
signals as presets.
113
Clear Preset
(Clear Preset)
Clears radio stations registered to preset numbers.
113
Clear All Preset
(ClearAllPreset)
Clears all the radio stations registered to preset
numbers.
113
Add to favorites
(Add to Fav.)
Adds your favorite Internet radio station to
the“Favorites” folder.
114
Removes it from the “Favorites” folder.
114
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models
only)
76
• When the input icon is displayed on the upper right of the “Option” menu, the setting is applied to the currently
selected input source. Otherwise, the setting is applied to all of the input sources.
Video Out
(Video Out)
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
Page
Enables/disables the video signal processing settings
configured in the “Setup” menu.
Video Processing
(Video Process.)
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Function
Video Mode
(V.M)
• Default settings are underlined.
Item
Dialogue
(Dialog)
110
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume.
110
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is
adjusted.
110
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.
110
DTS Dialogue
Control
(DTS Dialog)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X
contents.
111
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds.
111
Remove from favorites
(RemovefromFav.)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
111
Init Scan
(Init Scan)
Lipsync
(Lipsync)
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio).
111
Input Trim
(In. Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources.
112
Subwoofer Trim
(SW. Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
112
Enables/disables Extra Bass.
112
Selects the audio signal to be played back.
112
Audio Select
(A.Sel)
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
Preset
(Preset)
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)
Audio Select
(Audio Select)
Shuffle / Repeat
(Shuffle/Repeat)
Page
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and
low-frequency range individually.
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)
Function
111
En
Tune AID
(Tune AID)
On-screen Information
(On-screen Info)
109
Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models
only)
79
Checks reception strength of each DAB channel label.
Displays the current status information.
114
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) individually.
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when
the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
volume at night.
Settings
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments
Y
Off (Off)
The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
On (On)
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled.
• When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears.
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
volume.
■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Output level
Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.
YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency
On
Off
Volume: high
Output level
Volume: low
On
Input level
levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume.
Off
Input level
■ Dialogue (Dialog)
Settings
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Off (Off)
Disables YPAO Volume.
On (On)
Enables YPAO Volume.
Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
X
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can
turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “YPAO” have been already saved (p.44).
Setting range
0 to 3
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at
night.
X
This setting is not available when DTS:X content is played back, or when the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder
is working.
En
110
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
DTS Dialogue Control (DTS Dialog)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X contents.
Setting range
0 to 6
Enhancer (Enhancer)
X
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.71).
This setting is available only when DTS:X content which supports the DTS Dialogue Control feature is played back.
X
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.71).
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from
below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.
Settings
X
This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
Off (Off)
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On)
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers
are used.
Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.66) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
Others: Off (Off)
Y
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
– DSD audio
Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
Ideal position
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is
set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel
PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings
■ Lipsync (Lipsync)
Enables the high-resolution mode.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
On (On)
(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio signal
processing condition.)
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Off (Off)
Disables the high-resolution mode.
X
This setting is available only when “Delay Enable” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Enable” (default).
En
111
■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
■ Audio Select (Audio Select)
Configures the input settings.
Selects the audio signal to be played back.
Input Trim (In.Trim)
Audio Select (A.Sel)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input
when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Settings
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Auto (Auto)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
■ Extra Bass (Extra Bass)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass
HDMI (HDMI)
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input
through the HDMI jack.
COAX/OPT
(COAX/OPT)
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack.
Analog (Analog)
Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are
input through the AUDIO jacks.
sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the
subwoofer.
■ Video Processing (Video Process.)
Settings
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured
Off (Off)
Disables Extra Bass.
in “Resolution” and “Aspect” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu.
On (On)
Enables Extra Bass.
Configures the video signal processing settings.
Video Mode (V.M)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments)
settings configured in “Processing” (p.132) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings
En
112
Direct (Direct)
Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
(Processing)
Enables the video signal processing.
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)
Switches between the reception settings for FM radio.
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment” (p.133)
in the “Setup” menu.
FM Mode (Mode)
X
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
1 to 6
Settings
■ Video Out (V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Stereo (Stereo)
Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Monaural (Monaural)
Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
■ Preset (Preset)
Settings
Registers radio stations or clears preset stations.
Off (Off)
Does not output video.
AV 1-7 (AV1-7)
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
FM Auto Preset (FM Auto Preset)
Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals as presets.
■ Shuffle / Repeat (Shuffle/Repeat)
X
Configures the Shuffle settings or repeat settings.
• You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.
• (U.K., Europe, Russia and Middle East models only)
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “FM Auto Preset”.
Configures the shuffle setting for the USB storage device (p.86) or media server (p.90).
Clear Preset (Clear Preset)
Settings
Clears radio stations registered to preset numbers.
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order.
Clear All Preset (ClearAllPreset)
Clears all the radio stations registered to preset numbers.
Repeat (Repeat)
Settings
Configures the repeat setting for the USB storage device (p.86) or media server (p.90).
Settings
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly.
En
113
Cancel
Cancels the unregistering of a radio station.
Execute
Removes all registered radio stations.
■ Add to favorites (Add to Fav.)
Register the currently playing Internet radio station to the “Favorites” folder.
X
You can also register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth input source as shortcuts (p.105).
■ Remove from favorites (RemovefromFav.)
Remove an Internet radio station from the “Favorites” folder.
■ Init Scan (Init Scan)
Initiate Scan specifies the initial settings in order to receive DAB radio. If this operation is not
performed, not all DAB-related functions can be used.
■ Tune AID (Tune AID)
From the “Tune Aid” menu , you can check the reception level of each channel.
■ On-screen Information (On-screen Info)
Displays the current status information.
En
114
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
Perform the following basic procedure to operate the “Setup” menu. You can configure the
unit’s various functions with the “Setup” menu.
X
• If new firmware is available, the message screen appears.
• If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears at the lower of the “Setup” menu.
1
2
Press SETUP.
3
4
5
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select a setting.
Press SETUP.
This completes the settings.
En
115
Setup menu items
Use the following table to configure various functions of the unit.
Menu
Item
Function
Page
Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
121
Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
121
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
121
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
122
Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.
122
Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.
122
Front Presence
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.
122
Rear Presence
Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.
123
Subwoofer
Configuration
Speaker
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected.
123
Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.
123
Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
123
Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
124
Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output.
125
YPAO Result
Checks and Reloads the previous YPAO adjustments.
125
En
116
Menu
Item
Lipsync
DSP Parameter
Sound
Surround Decoder
11ch Stereo
125
Enables/disables the “Lipsync” adjustment configured in “Auto/Manual Select” in the “Setup” menu.
126
Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
126
Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.
126
DSP Level
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
126
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation.
127
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field.
127
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field.
127
Reverb Time
Adjusts the decay time of the rear reverberant sound.
127
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation.
127
Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound.
127
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation.
127
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field.
128
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field.
128
Surround Back Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation.
128
Surround Back Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field.
128
Surround Back Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field.
128
Decode Type
Selects a surround decoder to be used.
128
Center Spread
Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when 2-channel source is played.
128
Center Image
Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field.
128
Level
Adjusts the entire volume.
129
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear volume balance.
129
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the left and right volume balance.
129
Height Balance
Adjusts the height volume balance using the presence speakers.
129
Monaural Mix
Enables/disables monaural sound output.
129
Reset
Restores all default settings.
129
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.
129
Max Volume
Sets the limit value of the volume.
130
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.
130
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.
130
Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP 3D effect level when the volume is adjusted.
130
VPS
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers.
130
VSBS
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.
130
Adaptive DSP Level
Virtual Speaker
Page
Delay Enable
Dynamic Range
Volume
Function
Displays information about the current audio signal.
Information
Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode
Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.
131
DAC Digital Filter
Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter).
131
Balance Input Attenuator
Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input to avoid sound distortion.
131
En
117
Menu
Item
Function
Page
Scene Setting
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments.
131
Scene Rename
Renames the scene name displayed on the front display or TV screen.
132
Information
Displays information about the current video signal and the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
132
Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing.
132
Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals.
133
Aspect
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals.
133
Adjustment
Configures the video adjustments.
133
HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control.
134
TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input.
134
ARC
Enables/disables ARC.
134
Standby Sync
Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit.
134
HDMI Audio Output
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV.
134
HDMI ZONE OUT Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
134
HDCP Version
Selects the version of HDCP used on the HDMI input jacks.
135
HDMI Standby Through
Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.
135
Information
Displays the network information on the unit.
135
Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
136
IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
136
Network Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.
136
Scene
Video Mode
Video/HDMI
HDMI Control
Network
MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
137
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback.
137
AirPlay Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay.
137
Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
138
MusicCast Link Power Interlock
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (this unit) also turns on the power of other
devices of the network.
138
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions.
138
Disconnect
Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit.
139
Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby).
139
Audio Receive
En
118
Menu
Item
Function
Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4
Information
Page
139
Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
139
Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 limit value of the volumes.
140
Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
140
Audio Delay
Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2.
140
Monaural
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
140
Enhancer
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 output.
140
Tone Control
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone2 output.
140
Extra Bass
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 output.
140
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the volume balance for Zone2 output.
140
Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone3 output.
139
Max Volume
Sets the Zone3 limit value of the volumes.
140
Initial Volume
Sets the Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
140
Audio Delay
Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone3.
140
Monaural
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone3 output.
140
Enhancer
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone3 output.
140
Tone Control
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone3 output.
140
Extra Bass
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone3 output.
140
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the volume balance for Zone3 output.
140
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name displayed on the TV screen.
141
Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode.
141
Zone2
Multi Zone
Zone3
En
119
Menu
Item
Function
Page
Information
Displays the system information on the unit.
141
Language
Selects an on-screen menu language.
141
Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
142
Input Skip
Sets which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT key.
142
Input Rename
Changes the input source name displayed on the front display.
142
Auto Play
Enables/disables Auto Play function in Internet radio services.
143
DSP Skip
Sets which sound programs are skipped when operating the PROGRAM key.
143
PROGRAM Key
Sets the function for the PROGRAM key on the remote control.
143
Color Key
Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control.
144
Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
144
Volume
Switches the scale of the volume display.
144
Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.
144
Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV screen.
144
Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack to function.
145
Target Zone
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack functions are synchronized.
145
Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack to function.
145
Target Zone
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack functions are synchronized.
145
Auto Power Standby
Remote Key
System
Display Set
Trigger Output1
Trigger Output2
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.
146
Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
146
Firmware Update
Updates the firmware via the network.
147
ECO
En
120
Speaker
■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Configures the speaker settings manually.
Choices
X
Default settings are underlined.
Pattern1 ▶ 2
Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Pattern2 ▶ 1
Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
X
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or
larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”) as a guide.
• When the speaker size is set to “Small”, you can configure the “Crossover”. Frequency sounds lower than the
specified value will be output from the subwoofer and higher will be output from the corresponding speakers.
■ Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
Front
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the
Selects the size of the front speakers.
selected pattern.
Settings
• Configuration
• Distance
Large
• Level
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components.
Select this option for small speakers.
• Parametric EQ
Small
• YPAO Result
Settings
Pattern1, Pattern2
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than
the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
X
“Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
X
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the center of the diagram on the right side of the screen.
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you
can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
En
121
Center
Surround Back
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
Settings
Large
Select this option when large speakers are connected.
Select this option for large speakers.
Large
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components.
Select this option for small speakers.
Small
None
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.
Select this option when small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Small
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
None
Surround
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
X
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes and layout.
This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”.
Settings
Front Presence
Select this option for large speakers.
Large
Small
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency
components.
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size and layout.
Select this option for small speakers.
Settings
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
Select this option for small speakers.
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
None
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP
works when you select a sound program.
Layout Settings
Rear
Front
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the
room.
Small
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce front presence channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
Layout Settings
Front Height
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the
room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT works in this case.
X
This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the front side
wall.
Overhead
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.
Dolby Enabled SP
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front presence
speakers.
X
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.
• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26).
En
122
Rear Presence
Layout settings
Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.
Left + Right
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right sides of the
room.
Front + Rear
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear sides of the
room.
Monaural x2
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.
Settings
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce rear presence channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).
Small
None
X
This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.
Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.
■ Distance
Layout Settings
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
Rear Height
Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed on the rear side wall.
Overhead
Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.
Dolby Enabled SP
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the rear presence
speakers.
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from
“Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
X
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.
Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack
■ Level
and its phase.
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Settings
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Normal
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other
channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other
channels.
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Use
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels when both
“Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
X
When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
En
123
■ Parametric EQ
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
1
2
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
Settings
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
X
YPAO:Flat
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, use the cursor keys to select “PEQ Data Clear”, press ENTER,
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front
speakers.
YPAO:Natural
Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “YPAO” (p.44) to the “Manual” fields for fine
Through
Does not use the equalizer.
and then select “OK”.
adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
X
4
Use the cursor keys to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for subwoofer).
5
To fine-adjust the center frequency, Q factor (bandwidth) or gain, use the cursor keys to select
“YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “YPAO”
have already been saved (p.44). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
an item.
Freq.: Use the cursor keys to adjust the center frequency of the selected band.
Q: Use the cursor keys to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band.
Gain: Use the cursor keys to adjust the gain of the selected band.
Setting range
Center frequency: 15.6 Hz to 16.0 kHz (15.6 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
6
En
124
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Sound
■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
Configures the audio output settings.
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
■ Information
Off
Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or
equalizer.
Displays information about the current audio signal.
Choices
Format
■ YPAO Result
You can check the previous YPAO adjustments (“Wiring”, “Size”, “Distance”, “Level”, “Angle
(horizontal)” and “Height”) in “YPAO Result”.
Channel
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, you can discard the
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels,
2 surround channels, and LFE).
Input
(When DTS:X content is played back)
For example, “7.1.4” denotes “standard 7.1-channel plus 4 for
overhead speaker channels”.
manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
1
2
3
Audio format of the input signal
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload”.
Output
Press ENTER.
Press SETUP.
Sampling
The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Dialogue
The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Channel
The number of signal output channels (for example, “5.1.2”
denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker
channels”) and the Speaker channels from which signals are
output
X
Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
En
125
■ Lipsync
Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set
to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to
Delay Enable
“Auto”.
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4
Settings
Disable
Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Auto/Manual Select
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
X
Setting range
• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and
fine adjustment.
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that
supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio
output manually.
■ DSP Parameter
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Selects the sound program to change the settings of the sound program.
• This setting is also available in “Lipsync” (p.111) in the “Option” menu.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Y
DSP Level
Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
Adjusts the sound field effect level. Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
reduce it.
Setting range
-6 dB to +3 dB
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
En
126
Initial Delay
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation.
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. Higher to
Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
Setting range
1 ms to 99 ms
Setting range
0 ms to 250 ms
Y
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Reverb Level
Room Size
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and
Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field.
lower to weaken it.
Setting range
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)
Setting range
0 % to 100 %
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
Y
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Liveness
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field.
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation.
Setting range
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)
Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
Y
Setting range
1 ms to 49 ms
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
Y
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
Reverb Time
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Adjusts the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. Higher to enrich the reverberant sound
and lower to have clear sound.
Setting range
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
En
127
Surround Room Size
Surround Back Liveness
Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field.
Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field.
Setting range
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)
Setting range
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)
Y
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Surround Liveness
■ Surround Decoder
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field.
Configures the surround decoders settings.
Setting range
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)
Decode Type
Y
Selects a surround decoder to be used.
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
Choices
Auto, bDsur, Neural:X, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Surround Back Initial Delay
Center Spread
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation.
Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when a 2channel source
Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
is played. This setting is effective when “bDsur” is selected.
Setting range
1 ms to 49 ms
Settings
Y
Off
Disables Center Spread.
On
Enables Center Spread.
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
X
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
If you feel the center sound is too strong, set this function to “On”.
Surround Back Room Size
Center Image
Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field.
Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Adjust this higher to
Setting range
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)
strengthen the center localization (less broadening effect) or lower to weaken it (more
broadening effect).This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected.
Y
Setting range
0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
En
128
■ 11ch Stereo
Monaural Mix
Adjusting the volume settings.
Enables/disables monaural sound output. This setting is effective when “11ch Stereo” is
selected.
Level
Settings
Adjusts the entire volume. This setting is effective when “11ch Stereo” is selected.
Setting range
-5 to 0 to 5
Off
Disables monaural sound output.
On
Enables monaural sound output.
Reset
Front / Rear Balance
Restores all default settings.
Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to
enhance the rear side. This setting is effective when “11ch Stereo” is selected.
■ Dynamic Range
Setting range
-5 to 0 to 5
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS
signals) playback.
Left / Right Balance
Settings
Adjusts the left and right volume balance. Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to
enhance the left side. This setting is effective when “11ch Stereo” is selected.
Setting range
-5 to 0 to 5
Maximum
Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard
Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes.
Minimum/Auto
Height Balance
Adjusts the height volume balance using the presence speakers. Higher to enhance the upside,
and lower to enhance the downside. This setting is effective when “11ch Stereo” is selected.
Setting range
0 to 5 to 10
X
The presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.
En
129
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically
adjusted based on the input signal information.
■ Volume
■ Virtual Speaker
Setting the volume.
Setting Virtual Speaker.
VPS
Max Volume
Sets the limit value of the volume.
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround
speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front presence speakers are
Setting range
-60.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB [20.5 to 95.5 (5.0 increments), 97.0]
connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
presence speakers (p.66).
Initial Volume
Settings
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Off
Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
Settings
On
Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
Off
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments)
[0.5 to 97.0 (0.5 increments)].
X
Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set “Virtual
Presence Speaker” to “Off”.
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
VSBS
■ Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.71).
When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected.
Settings
Settings
Auto
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected
input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is
selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed.
Video Off
Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
Off
Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
On
Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
X
VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings
Off
Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results
and the volume level.
En
130
Scene
■ Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode
Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.
Configures the scene settings.
Input source
AV 1-7, AUDIO 1-4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned), (network sources),
Bluetooth, USB
■ Scene Setting
Settings
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently
Off
assigned to the selected scene.
Disables the jitter elimination function.
X
Enables the jitter elimination function.
The scene assignments can include radio stations, or the content on a selected USB storage device, Bluetooth
Level 1, Level 2, Level 3 The higher level enhances the DAC accuracy, but may cause audio interruptions
on some playback devices depending on the audio clock conditions. In this case,
select lower level.
device, and network device.
■ Procedure
■ DAC Digital Filter
1
Use the cursor keys to select the SCENE name and press ENTER.
Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have favorite
2
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press
sounds.
ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
Settings
Sharp Roll-off Type
Slow Roll-off Type
Short Latency Type
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with steep attenuation characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce clear sounds.
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with gentle attenuation characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce soft sounds.
Reduces the audio delay caused by the DAC internal digital filter.
It has a tendency to produce responsive and rhythmical sounds.
Choices
■ Balance Input Attenuator
Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input (AUDIO 4) so that you can
HDMI Control
Control Sync (HDMI Control (p.134))
Input
Input (p.63), Audio Select (p.112)
avoid sound distortion when high-level signals are input.
[Input sources: TUNER, (network sources), SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB]
Activate the attenuator when connecting an audio device which outputs signals of 3 V (RMS) or
Registerd Content
higher to the AUDIO 4 (XLR balanced input) jacks (p.36).
Station, Music Content
[Input sources: others]
---
Input source
AUDIO 4
Settings
Bypass
Does not activate the attenuator for the balance input.
ATT.(-6dB)
Activates the attenuator for the balance input to reduce the signal level (-6dB).
En
131
HDMI Output
HDMI Output (p.63)
Mode
DSP Program (p.67), Pure Direct Mode (p.130), Enhancer (p.140), Hi-Res Mode
(p.111), SURROUND:AI (p.66)
Sound
Tone Control (p.110), YPAO Volume (p.110), Adaptive DRC (p.110),
Extra Bass (p.112)
Surround
Dialogue Lift (p.111), Dialogue Level (p.110), Subwoofer Trim (p.112)
Video
Video Mode (p.132), Video Adjustment (p.113)
Volume
Master Volume (p.63)
Lipsync
Lipsync (p.111), Delay (p.126)
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern (p.121), Parametric EQ (p.124)
Zone Interlock
Power (p.103), Input (p.103), Volume (p.103) *1, 2
Video/HDMI
Configures the video/HDMI settings.
■ Information
Displays information about the current video signal and the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT
*1 The “Volume” setting is not available with Zone4.
jacks.
*2 For “Volume”, the “Initial Volume” setting in the “Multi Zone” menu has priority.
Choices
X
To restore the default settings for the selected scene, select “Reset”.
■ Scene Rename
Changes the SCENE name displayed on the front display or on the TV.
HDMI Signal
Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
HDMI Monitor
Video Resolution
Resolutions supported by the TV
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys to select the SCENE name and press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename.
■ Video Mode
Configures the video signal processing settings.
Video Mode
X
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments).
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Settings
3
Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
Direct
X
Processing
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
Disables the video signal processing.
Enables the video signal processing.
Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.
X
To exit from the menu, Press SETUP.
When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce
video output delay.
En
132
Resolution
Adjustment
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can register
the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).
Settings
Through
Does not convert the resolution.
Auto
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
X
The video adjustments work on the video signals with 1080p or lower resolution.
■ Setup procedure
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
X
If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.149) in the
1
2
Use the ENTER to select a preset number.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV
normally.)
Aspect
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Settings
Through
Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the
screen.
X
This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p
Detail Enhancement
(4K) signals.
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.
Setting range
0 to 50
Edge Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.
Setting range
0 to 50
Brightness
Adjusts the video brightness.
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100
En
133
ARC
Contrast
Adjusts the video contrast.
Enables/disables ARC (p.174) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100
Settings
Saturation
Adjusts the video saturation.
Off
Disables ARC.
On
Enables ARC.
Y
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100
You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the
unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use
the TV’s speakers.
■ HDMI Control
Standby Sync
Configures the HDMI control settings.
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when
HDMI Control
“HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.172).
Settings
Settings
Off
On
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Disables HDMI Control.
On
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Enables HDMI Control.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is
receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.
Y
■ HDMI Audio Output
To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.172) after connecting HDMI
Selects whether the HDMI sound is output from the TV speakers.
Control-compatible devices.
X
TV Audio Input
The “HDMI OUT1” setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set
HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2, HDMI ZONE OUT
to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is
switched to its built-in tuner.
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack, HDMI OUT 2
jack or HDMI ZONE OUT.
Settings
AUDIO 1-3
Settings
Y
When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an
external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
Off
Disables the audio output from the TV.
On
Enables the audio output from the TV.
Y
The HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
En
134
Network
■ HDMI ZONE OUT Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Configures the network settings.
Settings
Zone2, Zone4
■ Information
X
Displays the network information on the unit.
For details on audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.172).
Choices
■ HDCP Version
IP Address
IP address
Selects the HDCP version of the HDMI input jacks for watching 4K video content.
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask
Input sources
AV 1-7
Default Gateway
The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P)
The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S)
The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address
(Ethernet)
MAC address
Settings
Auto
Automatically sets the version of HDCP according to content.
1.4
Sets the version of HDCP to always be 1.4.
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
■ HDMI Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in
stand by mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys to
select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit
Settings
(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the
power saving mode.
En
Network name (the unit’s name on the network)
MusicCast Network
The status of the MusicCast network connection.
Wired/Wireless (Wi-Fi)
The status of the wired or wireless connection
SSID
blinks).
Off
Network Name
135
(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network
■ Network Connection
3
Use the cursor keys to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
Selects the network connection method.
IP Address
Settings
Wired
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
commercially-available network cable (p.39).
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless
router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a
wireless network” (p.57).
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
DHCP
Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask
Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P)
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S)
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
4
Use the cursor keys to move the edit position and to select a value.
5
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
6
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
7
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
■ Network Standby
Settings
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby).
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For
details, see “Manual network settings”.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such
as IP address).
Settings
Off
On
IP Address
Disables the network standby function.
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Enables the network standby function.
Set the network parameters (such as IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway)
Auto
manually.
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving
mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
■ Manual network settings
1
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “IP Address” and press ENTER.
With an advanced energy saving design, this product achieves a low power consumption of not
more than two watts when in Network Standby mode.
En
136
■ MAC Address Filter
■ DMC Control
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Selects whether to allow a Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. A Digital Media
Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When
Filter
this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows
Media Player 12) on the same network.
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
Off
Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1-10”, specify the MAC addresses
of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit.
Settings
X
AirPlay (p.97) and DMC (p.137) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.
Disable
Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable
Allows DMCs to control playback.
■ AirPlay Volume Interlock
MAC Address 1-10
Enables/disables volume control from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay. When other than “Off” is set,
you can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPhone during playback.
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to
the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
Interlock
■ Procedure
Settings
1
Use the cursor keys to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys to move the edit position and to select a value.
3
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
Off
Limited
Full
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
En
137
Disables volume control from iTunes/iPhone
Enables volume control from iTunes/iPhone within the limited range
(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).
Enables volume control from iTunes/iPhone in the full range
(-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute).
Bluetooth
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
Configures the Bluetooth settings.
Network Name
■ Setup procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename .
■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.85).
Settings
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ MusicCast Link Power Interlock
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit)
also turns on the power of other devices of the network.
Settings
Off
Disables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
On
Enables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
En
138
Off
Disables the Bluetooth function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth function.
Multi Zone
■ Audio Receive
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio receiver.
Configures the multi zone settings.
Disconnect
■ Information
Terminates the Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth device (such as a smartphone) and
Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
the unit.
Choices
■ Procedure
1
Select “Disconnect” and press ENTER to terminate the Bluetooth connection.
X
This setting is not available when no Bluetooth devices are connected.
On/Off
Displays the status of each zone.
Input
The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
Volume
The volume setting for Zone2 and Zone3.
Tone Control
The tone control setting (the level of Treble and Bass) for Zone2 and Zone3.
Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices
(Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a
connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.
Settings
Off
On
Disables the Bluetooth standby function.
Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
■ Zone2, Zone3 Set
X
Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.
This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.136) is set to “Off”.
Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the volume
adjustment for the corresponding zone.
Settings
En
139
Fixed
Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Variable
Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Max Volume
Enhancer
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 limit value of the volumes.
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.71) for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Setting range
-60.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB [20.5 to 90.5 (5.0 increments), 97.0]
Settings
X
Off
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Tone Control
Initial Volume
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) for Zone2 or
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Zone3 output.
Settings
Settings
Off
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments) [0.5 to
97.0 (0.5 increments)].
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
X
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Auto
Adjusts the levels of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range
(Bass) automatically in synchronization with the main volume, with correction for
the auditory response of the human ear.
Manual
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass)
manually (-6.0 to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
Bypass
Does not adjust the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency
range (Bass).
Audio Delay
Extra Bass
Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3 so that the audio is synchronized with the
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 or Zone3 output. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can
video.
enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of speakers.
Setting range
0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)
Settings
Monaural
Off
Disables Extra Bass.
On
Enables Extra Bass.
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Left / Right Balance
Settings
Off
Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
On
Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
Setting range
-20 to 0 to +20 (negative to the left and positive to the right)
En
140
System
■ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Configures the system settings.
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys to select Zone, and then press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename.
■ Information
Displays the system information on the unit.
Choices
X
3
Remote ID
The unit’s remote control ID setting
TV Format
The unit’s video signal type
Tuner Frequency Step
(Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit
System ID
System ID number
Firmware Version
The version of firmware installed on the unit
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
■ Language
Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
Select an on-screen menu language.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.104) for each zone.
Choice
Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4
Settings
English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian, Chinese
Settings
X
Disable
Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by
pressing PARTY on the remote control.
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
X
When party mode is being used, the Disable/Enable setting cannot be changed.
En
141
■ Input Assignment
■ Input Skip
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
Set which input sources are skipped when operating the INPUT key or AV CONTROLLER. You
can select the desired input source quickly by using this function.
Input Assignment
X
When using AV CONTROLLER, you cannot select the input sources set to “On” in this function.
■ Procedure
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (2) jack to the input source “AV 2”
1
Input sources
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB, MULTI CH
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “OPTICAL”, and press
ENTER.
Settings
Off
Does not skip the selected input source.
On
Skips the selected input source.
■ Input Rename (Auto)
Automatically changes the input source names displayed on the front display.You can select a
name created by the Auto Rename function.
2
Input sources
AV 1-7, AUDIO 1-4
Use the cursor keys to select “2” and press ENTER.
■ Procedure
3
1
Use the cursor keys to select an input source to be renamed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Auto”.
3
To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 2.
4
Press SETUP.
X
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
X
• When “Auto” is selected, the created name is saved even after the external device is disconnected. To reset to
the default setting, switch the setting to “Manual” and then back to “Auto”.
You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
• “Auto” can be selected for AUDIO 1-4 only if a digital “Input Assignment” setting is selected.
En
142
■ Input Rename (Manual)
■ DSP Skip
Allows the input source names displayed on the front display to be set manually.
Set which sound programs are skipped when operating the PROGRAM key.You can select the
desired sound program quickly by using this function.
Input sources
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4, PHONO, TUNER, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB, MULTI CH
Settings
■ Procedure
Off
Does not skip the selected sound program.
1
Use the cursor keys to select an input source to be renamed.
On
Skips the selected sound program.
2
Press ENTER.
■ Remote Key
The cursor moves to the name edit screen.
3
Configures the Remote Key settings.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
PROGRAM Key
X
• To cancel the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Sets the function that is assigned to the PROGRAM key on the remote control. You can use the
• If you select “RESET”, the default input name will be inserted into the editing area.
PROGRAM key for other than DSP program selection.
4
To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3.
5
Press SETUP.
Settings
Assign 1
Enables selecting the DSP Programs.
Enables selecting just the DSP Movie/Music Programs.
Assign 2
■ Auto Play
The up key of the PROGRAM keys: toggle between the Movie Programs.
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: toggle between the Music Programs
Enables/disables Auto Play function in Internet streaming services and following input
Assign 3
sources.
Assign 4
Enables moving to the previous/next page of the Browse Screen.
Input sources
(network sources), SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB
Assign 5
Enables fine-adjusting the subwoofer volume.
Assign 6
Settings
Enables selecting the NETWORK sources.
Enables adjusting the volume of dialogue sounds.
Enables selecting shuffle/repeat settings.
Off
Disables Auto Play function.
On
Starts automatically to play back the last content which you played back.
Auto
Starts automatically to play back the content which only you played back at
setting the unit to standby mode.
Assign 7
The up key of the PROGRAM keys: repeat
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: shuffle
Displays the front/on-screen display information.
Assign 8
The up key of the PROGRAM keys: front display information
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: on-screen display information
Y
X
In some input sources or content, you might not enable Auto Play function.
This setting does not change the function of the PROGRAM key on the front panel.
X
With some input sources, “Auto” cannot be selected.
En
143
Color Key
Volume
Set the function to operate the external device with the RED / GREEN / YELLOW / BLUE key on
Switches the scale of the volume display.
the remote control.
Settings
Settings
Default
Assigns the functions of devices connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.
dB
Displays the volume in the “dB” unit.
0-97
Displays the volume in the numeric value (0 to 97).
This setting is effective when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Assigns the functions of TV Control to each key.
Short Message
RED: EXIT (closes the menu on the TV)
TV Control
GREEN: INFO (displays information about the TV such as the resolution)
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
YELLOW: BROADCAST (switches the TV broadcast type)
input selection and volume adjustment).
BLUE: INPUT (switches the TV input)
Settings
This setting is effective when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Y
On
Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off
Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
• For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see “HDMI Control” (p.134)
Wallpaper
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup after connecting HDMI Control
compatible devices (p.172).
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
• HDMI Control might not work properly.
Settings
■ Display Set
Piano
Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
En
144
■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Target Zone
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
switching.
Settings
Trigger Mode
Main
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Power
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
Zone2
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.”
Manual
Zone3
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission
with “Manual”.
Source
Zone4
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when
“Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB, MULTI CH
All
Settings
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
High
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in
this option.
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is
set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device
connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High
Transmits the electronic signal.
En
145
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of any zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in any zone.
■ ECO
■ Memory Guard
Changes the setting for the auto-standby function.
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Memory Guard
Settings
Off
Does not protect the settings.
On
Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
X
When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no
input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby
mode.
Settings
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
5 minutes, 20 minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and the unit
has not detected any input signal for the specified time.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the
specified time.
Icon
Default
U.K., Europe and Russia models: 20 minutes
Other models: Off
X
Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front
display.
En
146
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
■ Firmware Update
Update the firmware.
Firmware Update
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
Updates the firmware via the network. You can also check the firmware version and system ID.
Perform the following basic procedure to operate the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu.
Item
Firmware Version
The version of the firmware installed on the unit.
System ID
The system ID number.
1
2
Set the unit to standby mode.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z
X
STRAIGHT
• Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the Internet connection speed is slow, or the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may
not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, wait a while before
updating the firmware again, or update the firmware using the USB memory device. For details on using the
USB memory device, see “Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE)” (p.151).
PROGRAM
USB Update
3
4
5
Perform a firmware update using a USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu.
X
For information about updating the firmware using a USB memory device, see “Updating the firmware (FIRM.
UPDATE)” (p.151) in “Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)”.
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
The new settings take effect.
En
147
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
X
REMOTE ID
Default settings are underlined.
Item
Function
Page
ID1
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1).
REMOTE SENSOR
Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.
148
When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique
REMOTE ID
Selects the unit’s remote control ID.
148
remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
148
Settings
ID1, ID2
TUNER FRQ STEP
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
TV FORMAT
Switches the video signal type.
149
MONITOR CHECK
Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.
149
4K MODE
Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format.
149
DTS MODE
Switches the DTS format notification setting.
150
BACKUP/RESTORE
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from
the backup.
150
INITIALIZE
Restores the default settings.
150
FIRM. UPDATE
Updates the firmware.
151
VERSION
Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
151
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1
To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 together for 5 seconds.
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 together for 5 seconds.
X
If the remote control ID does not match that of the unit, “RemID Mismatch” appears on the unit’s front
display when the remote control is operated.
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9
REMOTE SENSOR
ON
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region.
Settings
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is
turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by
10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by
9-kHz steps.
Settings
ON
Turns on the remote control sensor.
OFF
Turns off the remote control sensor.
En
148
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)
TV FORMAT
NTSC
4K MODE
MODE 1
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K compatible TV and
playback device are connected to the unit.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Settings
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Brazil and General models: NTSC
Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.
MODE 1
Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed
correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.
MODE 2
Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.
Other models: PAL
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
Format
MODE 1
8 bit
MONITOR CHECK
YES
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.133)
when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different
resolution than the detected resolution.
4K/30, 25, 24 Hz
Settings
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution
supported by the TV only.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified
resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
,
YCbCr 4:4:4
,
4K/60, 50 Hz
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
YES
RGB 4:4:4
10 bit
MODE 2
12 bit
8 bit
10 bit
-
-
-
-
12 bit
YCbCr 4:2:2
,
-
YCbCr 4:2:0
,
,
-
RGB 4:4:4
,
,
-
YCbCr 4:4:4
,
,
YCbCr 4:2:2
,
,
Y
When “MODE 1” is selected, use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with Ethernet.
Y
Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after
“MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
En
149
Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE)
4
When “Please Power Off!” appears on the front display, press z (power) to set the unit to
standby mode and turn it on again.
DTS MODE
MODE 1
If “Failed” appears on the front display, check the following and start the process again.
In case of “BACKUP”:
Switches the DTS format notification setting.
• You cannot overwrite save. When you save the settings repeatedly, please move the file in
This setting informs the video device (such as BD/DVD player) about the DTS formats that the
different folder.
unit supports.
• The file is stored by the name of “MC_backup_(model name).dat” in the root of the USB
Settings
memory device.
This mode conforms to the DTS:X standard.
MODE 1
In case of “RESTORE”:
Use this setting under normal circumstances.
• Check that the file is stored in the route of the USB memory device.
Use this setting if the video device (such as BD/DVD player) fails to properly output
a DTS signal even when it is playing back DTS-HD or DTS:X content.
MODE 2
Y
• “RESTORE” is effective after backuping all the settings.
Backing up/recovering the settings (BACKUP/RESTORE)
• Do not turn off the unit during the backuping and restoring process. Otherwise, the settings may not be
restored correctly.
• The user information (such as account, password) is not saved.
BACKUP/RESTORE
BACKUP
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
Backups and restores all the unit's setting to a USB memory device. Prepare a USB memory
device using FAT16 or FAT32 format in advance.
INITIALIZE
CANCEL
Choices
BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the USB memory device.
RESTORE
Restores the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when backup has
been created).
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
■ Backup/rstore procedure
1
Connect the USB memory device to the USB jack on the front panel.
2
To start the process, press STRAIGHT to select “BACKUP” or “RESTORE” and then press INFO
on the front panel.
3
Press INFO again after the confirmation message appears on the front display.
X
To cancel the operation, press STRAIGHT.
En
150
VIDEO
Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL
Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL
Does not perform an initialization.
Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE)
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
FIRM. UPDATE
USB
VERSION
x.xx
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the
X
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information
• You can also check the firmware version in “Information” (p.132) in the “System” menu.
supplied with updates.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the
information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware
update.
Choices
USB
Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK
Update the firmware via the network.
X
If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after SETUP is
pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s
firmware via the network” (p.152).
En
151
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
New firmware that provides additional features or product
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
HDMI OUT
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable
during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
INPUT
TUNER
NET
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.151).
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
Updating the unit’s firmware
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the
PURE DIRECT
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
SETUP
1
2
Read the on-screen description.
Use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off and the firmware update begins.
3
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on
the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel.
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
The firmware update is complete.
Cursor keys
ENTER
X
• The firmware update indicator (p.15) on the front display lights up when a firmware
update is available via the network.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
RETURN
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SETUP” menu (p.151).
• You might not get the message or the lighting up firmware update indicator on the
front display depending on the condition of the network connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.151).
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
SETUP is pressed.
• To perform the update when turning off the unit, select “LATER” in step 2, and then
follow the on-screen instructions. When a screen to confirm the firmware update
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
• If you want to cancel without doing anything now, select “CLOSE”.
• Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more.
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED
• You can also start the firmware update by pressing INFO on the front panel.
AI
X
BAND
appears after turning off the unit, press ENTER to start the firmware update.
When the firmware update is complete, the unit enters standby mode automatically.
TUNING
• To perform the update when turning off the unit, refer to the following instructions.
– The firmware update can be started by pressing INFO on the front panel.
– The unit turns off automatically without performing the firmware update if two
minutes pass after the screen to confirm the firmware update is displayed.
– To cancel the firmware update process, press RETURN, and the unit will turn off.
– The unit turns off without performing the firmware update if you turn off the unit
with AV CONTROLLER or MusicCast CONTROLLER.
En
152
APPENDIX
Additional Features
The following features were added for product improvements.
4
Select “Device Search” to search the Bluetooth devices.
The list of available Bluetooth devices is displayed.
Playing back audio from the unit on Bluetooth®-enabled
speakers/headphones
5
Select the Bluetooth speakers/headphones to be connected with the unit.
You can output audio played back from the unit on connected Bluetooth speakers or
Y
headphones.
If the desired Bluetooth device is not displayed on the list, set the Bluetooth device to the pairing mode
and then select “Device Search”.
When the connection process finishes, Bluetooth indicator lights up in the front display.
Y
• A Bluetooth device with the pass key other than “0000” cannot be connected to the unit.
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to the Bluetooth
The unit
device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth
connection.
Bluetooth speakers/headphones
• Terminate a Bluetooth connection with any of the following operations.
– Terminate the connection from the Bluetooth device.
Notice
– Set “Transmitter” in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
Audio transmitted via Bluetooth may be delayed. In addition, sound field effects selected on the unit are
not applied.
• For details on compatible Bluetooth devices, refer to the manual for this unit.
Notice
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between Bluetooth
• The following audio cannot be transmitted.
speakers/headphones and the unit.
1
– AirPlay and DSD audio
– PCM audio exceeding 192 kHz
Use the input selection keys on the remote control to select an input source.
– Super Audio CD (SACD) and DVD-Audio
Select an input source other than Bluetooth.
– Audio from radio and external devices connected to this unit, playing back with Pure Direct or Direct
enabled
The audio transmission function does not work when Bluetooth is selected as the input
• When connected to a Bluetooth device that does not support copyright protection technology
(SCMS-T), some content may not be played back.
source.
2
3
• Played back audio will also be output from speakers connected to the unit.
Press SETUP on the remote control to display the menu.
• Audio from a Bluetooth device (smartphone, etc.) cannot be played back.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Setup” → “Bluetooth” → “Audio
Send”, and then set “Transmitter” to “On”.
En
153
Bluetooth transmission operations
• Function for transmitting to Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth headphones, etc.)
• Supported profiles
– A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported codecs
– SBC
• Capable of play/stop operation from Bluetooth device (Bluetooth headphones, etc.)
En
154
Y
Using wireless surround speakers
(MusicCast Surround function)
• In a 5.1.2-channel or 5.1-channel system, the surround speakers and subwoofer can be wireless. With other
systems, only the subwoofer can be wireless.
• With wireless surround speakers
Using devices that support the MusicCast Surround function, you can enjoy a 5.1.2-channel or
– Sound will not be output from the speaker terminals (SURROUND) and pre-out jacks (SURROUND) on the
main unit.
5.1-channel theater system with wireless surround speakers and subwoofer.
– Surround back speakers and rear presence speakers cannot be used.
■ Devices supporting MusicCast Surround
• With a wireless subwoofer
– One subwoofer can be wireless.
As of October 31, 2018
Wireless streaming speakers
– Sound will not be output from the pre-out jacks (SUBWOOFER or SUBWOOFER 1 and 2) on the main unit.
Therefore, another subwoofer cannot be used by connecting it with an audio cable.
Network subwoofer
• The following audio cannot be output from the wireless surround speakers and subwoofer.
– Signals with a sampling frequency of 352.8 kHz or 384kHz
– DSD audio
– DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD (SACD) from HDMI input
1
MusicCast 50
MusicCast 20
MusicCast SUB 100
This unit and the devices supporting MusicCast Surround must be registered
with the same location on the MusicCast CONTROLLER app.
2
■ Sample speaker layout
Follow the app’s on-screen instructions to complete setup of the MusicCast
Surround function.
For a 5.1.2-channel system using two MusicCast 20 speakers and one MusicCast SUB 100.
Tap the settings
icon.
E
R
1
9
2
Tap “MusicCast
Surround/Stereo”.
3
For detailed setup instructions, refer to the following.
https://download.yamaha.com/files/tcm:39-1212383
4
5
3
Adjust the speaker settings automatically (YPAO).
Y
• For details on YPAO, refer to the manual for this unit.
• Multi measurement and angle/height measurement cannot be used.
4
En
155
Check the settings, and then enjoy content playback.
Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “YPAO” to optimize the
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
speaker settings again (p.44). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use
input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are
“Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.121).
watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.144) in the “Setup” menu to turn off
the short messages.
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the power amplifier or
“Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.146).
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
volume level for the unit in advance (p.130). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2
or Zone3 (p.140).
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different
remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.148).
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied.
applied when the receiver is turned on (p.130). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 or
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...
Zone3 (p.140).
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio
If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be
played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
function, set “HDMI Standby Through” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can
also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled.
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the
“Option” menu (p.112).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.172). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable
HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required
every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on
how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction
manuals for each device.
En
156
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit and power amplifier, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
1
2
3
The power cables of the unit, power amplifier, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely.
The unit, power amplifier, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest
When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks
Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
if you try to turn on the power.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit.
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it
supply voltage.
again.)
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The unit is not reacting.
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The sleep timer worked.
Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used for
the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to
“Off” (p.146).
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall
supply voltage.
outlet and plug it again.)
The unit is out of the operating range.
Use the remote control within the operating range (p.6).
The batteries are weak.
Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong
lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.148).
The remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.148).
En
157
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The device which is connected to the unit via HDMI does not support the
Use a device which supports the operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys.
operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys.
The RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote
control do not operate
The settings of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the unit's remote
Set “Color Key” (p.144) in the “Setup” menu to “Default”.
control have been changed.
HDMI control setting is “Off”.
Set “HDMI Control” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
Audio
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format
of the input signal, use “Information” in the “Sound” menu (p.125).
No sound.
The volume cannot be increased.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
The maximum volume is set.
Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.130).
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.
To check it, use “Information” in the “Sound” menu (p.125).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.125).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform “YPAO” (p.44) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker
settings (p.121).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform “YPAO” (p.44) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume
(p.123).
The speaker cable connecting the power amplifier and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the power amplifier
may be malfunctioning.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals.
To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.125).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform “YPAO” (p.44) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup” menu to
“Use” (p.123).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low.
Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.
Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
No sound from the playback device (connected to the Protection).
unit with HDMI).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the
limit.
En
158
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
Problem
No sound from the playback device (when HDMI
Control is used).
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used).
Cause
Remedy
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the playback device audio is output
from the speakers connected to the power amplifier.
TV audio is selected as the input source.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the power amplifier.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an
HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.33).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
(If you are trying to use ARC)
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.134).
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.134). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
No sound is coming from the Zone assigned with
“HDMI ZONE OUT Assign”.
The audio output from the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack is disabled.
Set “HDMI Audio Output - HDMI ZONE OUT” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.134).
Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only.
To check it, use “Information” in the “Sound” menu (p.125). If necessary, change the
digital audio output setting on the playback device.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.
Move the unit further away from the device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume.
The sound is interrupted.
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
to internal circuitry switching.
(p.101).
En
159
Video
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected on the unit.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.149).
No video.
No video from the playback device (connected to the
unit with HDMI).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video/HDMI”
in the “Setup” menu (p.132). For information about video signals supported by the unit,
see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.174).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2/2.3-compatible devices, both the
TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2/2.3.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The video is interrupted.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using
(p.63).
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
to internal circuitry switching.
(p.101).
En
160
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
Problem
Cause
Remedy
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Monaural” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.113).
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM
other electrical equipment.
antenna.
Select the station manually (p.73).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Select the station manually (p.73).
The AM radio signal is weak.
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the
supplied AM antenna.
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only)
Problem
No DAB radio reception.
Cause
Remedy
An initial scan has not been performed.
Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.76).
Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.
Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.79), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
There is no DAB coverage in your area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDAB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of
the DAB coverage in your area.
There is multi-path interference.
Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.79), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
No DAB radio reception even after performing an
initial scan.
DAB radio reception is weak or noisy.
DAB information is not available or is inaccurate.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
not provide information.
No DAB radio sound.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service.
En
161
Try the station later or select another station.
Bluetooth
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled.
A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted
during playback.
Enable the Bluetooth function (p.138).
Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.
Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.85).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.
Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP.
Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.
The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not
working for some reason.
Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.85).
The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low.
Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.
The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit.
Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.
The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.
Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.85).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.
Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
En
162
USB and network
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.
Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.
Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.
Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to
“On” on the unit (p.136). If you want to configure the network parameters manually,
check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your
network (p.136).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off.
Turn on the wireless router.
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart.
router (access point).
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access
point).
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might
disturb the wireless communication.
Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no
obstacles between them.
Turn off these devices.
Wireless network is not found.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
router (access point).
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are
shared (p.90).
The media sharing setting is not correct.
The unit does not detect the PC.
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
unit to your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
the PC to the same network.
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information
about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media
servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.90).
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been
stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the
station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played
only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number
varies depending on the radio station.
The Internet radio cannot be played.
En
163
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.
The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router.
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is not connected to the MusicCast
network.
Connect the device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
No sound from the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast connection cannot be made on
“MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
“MusicCast CONTROLLER” does not detect a
MusicCast compatible device.
The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.
Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and start “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.
Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and set the MusicCast compatible
device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
Disable the cellular data transmission.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Enable the network standby function on the MusicCast compatible device.
Firmware update via the network is failed.
It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.
En
164
Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.151).
Error indications on the front display
Message
Access denied
Cause
Remedy
Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.90).
The unit cannot access the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Access error
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.39).
Internal Error
An internal error has occurred.
Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content
There are no playable files in the selected folder.
Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Please wait
The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on
again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.148).
Remote Off
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote
control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP”
menu to “ON” (p.148).
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some
reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats
supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.90). If the unit supports
the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic.
Unable to play
Update failed.
Firmware update is failed.
Update the firmware again.
USB Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error
Firmware update is failed.
Update the firmware again.
En
165
Glossary
This section explains the technical terms used in this manual.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio
CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest
Audio information (audio decoding format)
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better
audio quality than that used for CDs.
Dolby Atmos
DTS 96/24
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format
Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as
remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This
independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3
technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of
DTS Dialog Control
sound above the listener.
DTS Dialog Control allows you to boost the dialog. This can be useful in noisy environments to help make the dialog
Dolby Atmos Stream
more intelligible. People with impaired hearing may also benefit. Note that the content creator may disable the use
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby
of this feature in the mix, so that DTS Dialog Control may not always be available. Note that updates to your AVR may
TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata
add more functionality to DTS Dialog Control or increase the range of the feature.
that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV
DTS Digital Surround
receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio.
Dolby Digital
This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel
DTS-ES
audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds
Dolby Digital Plus
a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that
recorded.
support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Express
Dolby Enabled Speaker
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology employ the
rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming
ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled
services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that can be built into a conventional
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback.
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing
Dolby Surround
multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for
discs).
playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as
DTS-HD Master Audio
well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater
technology.
experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of
Dolby TrueHD
96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition
BD (Blu-ray discs).
home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96
kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD
(Blu-ray discs).
En
166
DTS Neo:6
WAV
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting
music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix
audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression
channels of surround sound.
methods.
DTS:X
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS. Unbound from channels,
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich, realistic and immersive soundscape - in
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing
front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to
data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
automatically adapt the audio to the speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to
a home surround theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at
www.dts.com/dtsx
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in
compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression
method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10
maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on
Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3.
Neural:X
Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built in to DTS:X to
provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can
produce up to 11.x channels.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is
the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on
a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is
digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the
sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric
value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate.
En
167
Audio Information (Others)
HDMI and video information
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
Component video signal
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and
added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel
Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals
is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
is independent.
Lip sync
Composite video signal
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and
in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video
transmitted with a single cable.
output.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using
8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to
increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal
transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital
contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal
transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any
loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video
interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and
allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of
sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images.
En
168
Network information
Yamaha technologies
SSID
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Since the surround sound systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced
Wi-Fi
in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall
material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet
hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the
wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with
audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home.
network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can
carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
CINEMA DSP HD3
WPS
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP HD3
feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a
intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
wireless home network.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such
as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones
have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed
on headphones.
SURROUND:AI
The AI incorporated in the DSP analyzes scenes by focusing on sound elements such as “dialogue”, “background
music”, “ambient sounds” and “sound effects” as well as instantaneously creates the optimal surround effect in real
time. An expressive power beyond conventional single sound field effects maximizes the realistic feel.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left
and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front
surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without presence
speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room.
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed
of CINEMA DSP.
En
169
Supported devices and file formats
File formats
For information about specifications of each file, refer to the instruction manual of your
This section explains the devices and file formats supported by the unit.
recording device or consult file’s help.
Supported devices
■ USB/PC (NAS)
For information about specifications of each device, refer to the instruction manual of it.
File
■ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.
WAV *
• A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible,
depending on the model.
■ USB devices
• This unit is compatible with USB memory devices that are in FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Do not connect any other type of USB devices.
storage device.
Quantization
bitrate (bit)
Bitrate
The number
of channels
Gapless
playback
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192/352.8/384
16/24/32
-
2
,
MP3
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
WMA
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
MPEG-4 AAC
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
FLAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192/352.8/384
16/24
-
2
,
ALAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/96
16/24
-
2
,
AIFF
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192/352.8/384
16/24/32
-
2
,
DSD
2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz/
11.2 MHz
1
-
2
-
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB
Sampling frequency
(kHz)
■ AirPlay
* Linear PCM format only. 32 bit-float files cannot be played back.
This AV Receiver is compatible with AirPlay 2. iOS 11.4 or later is required.
Y
• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC
files on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
• When the sampling frequency is 352.8 kHz, playback is downsampled to 176.4 kHz; when the sampling
frequency is 384 kHz, playback is downsampled to 192 kHz.
• When Pure Direct is enabled, playback at 352.8 and 384 kHz is not downsampled. In addition, when Pure Direct
is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB cannot be delivered.
En
170
Video signal flow
Video conversion table
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output
X
to a TV as shown below.
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.132) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
Video device
The unit
TV
HDMI out
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
4K
m
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
720p
m
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
1080i
m (*)
m
m (*)
m (*)
1080p/50, 60 Hz
m (*)
m (*)
m
m
m
m
Resolution
480i/576i
480p/576p
HDMI in
HDMI out
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI in
1080p/24 Hz
m
4K
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
720p
m
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
1080i
m (*)
m
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
480i/576i
m
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PR
PB
PB
Y
Y
480p/576p
COMPONENT VIDEO in
VIDEO in
VIDEO
VIDEO
480i/576i
VIDEO in
m
m (*)
m: Available
* If “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” is set to “Zone2”, conversion to 4K is possible only from 1080p. All other resolutions are pass-through.
En
171
Multi-zone output
Information on HDMI
Audio signals that can be output to Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4 vary depending on how you
This section explains the functions related to HDMI and its signal compatibility.
connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks.
ZONE OUT jacks
In \ Out
Zone2
Zone3
HDMI Control
HDMI OUT 3
(ZONE OUT) jack
Zone2 (*1)
Zone4 (*2)
m (*4)
m (*5, 8)
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power
Digital audio (HDMI)
m (*3)
Digital audio (COAXIAL/OPTICAL)
m (*6)
m (*6)
m (*6)
Analog audio (AUDIO)
m
m
m
USB (*7)
m
m
m
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
Network sources (*7)
m
m
m
• Standby
TUNER
m
m
m
• Volume control including mute
and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control external devices (such as
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
m: Available
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
*1 Available when “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(HDMI Audio Output - HDMI ZONE OUT: On)
(Example)
*2 Available when “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
Available when “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
Playback device
also turns off
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
The unit turns off
(standby)
Turn off the TV
*5 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source
selected in the main zone is selected)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
*6 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection
*7 To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input, or use the
• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)
party mode (p.104).
• Controlling the external device from which video is displayed on the TV (playback and menu
*8 If the Main Zone and Zone4 share the same input, the audio format that can be received in
operations)
the Main Zone is restricted by the device connected to Zone4.
• Controlling the TV when you select TV audio input that is set in “TV Audio Input” in the
“Setup” menu
• Controlling the TV with the color (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) keys of the remote control
when “TV Control” is set for the color keys
En
172
(Example)
HDMI Control
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Video/HDMI”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
6
Press SETUP.
HDMI Control
Playback starts
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
Press SCENE 1
Y
HDMI Control might not work properly. For related functions and settings, refer to the following.
– For linking with the selected scene, see “Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE)” (p.64).
– For setting the jack for TV audio input, see “TV Audio Input” (p.134).
– For setting the functions of the color keys, see “Color Key” (p.144).
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
3
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
Y
4
This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
2
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback
devices.
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
5
6
Configure the settings of the unit.
1
2
Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select
Press SETUP.
the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
7
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
En
173
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
8
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV
or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal
to the TV.
Y
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4.
It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the
1
2
limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to
“AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
effectively.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.
• “ARC” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
• The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked
“ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for the TV.
Y
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an
audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.33).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
X
“AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO
1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.64), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE 7. (The settings must
be changed only when SCENE 7 is used as the default (TV Viewing).)
HDMI signal compatibility
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be
output, depending on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to
the instruction manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so
that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream
signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback
device.
En
174
Trademarks
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos,
Dolby Surround, Dolby Vision, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license
from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol,
DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.
The terms HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge
and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
Apple, AirPlay, Apple TV, Apple Watch, iPad, iPad Air, iPad Pro, iPhone,
Lightning, and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Google Noto Fonts
x.v.Color™
This product uses the following fonts.
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Copyright © June 2015, Google
(https://www.google.com/get/noto/#sans-lgc), with Reserved Font Name
Noto Sans Version 1.004.
Windows™
This AV Receiver is compatible with AirPlay 2. iOS 11.4 or later is required.
Yamaha Eco-Label is a mark that certifies products of high environmental
performance.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries.
Copyright © June 2015, Google
(https://www.google.com/get/noto/help/cjk/), with Reserved Font Name
Noto Sans CJK Version 1.004.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version1.1.
This license is available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
Explanations regarding GPL
Android™ Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(https://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).
App StoreSM
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
Licenses
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is
under license.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are certification
marks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
For information on the licenses of the third-party software in this
product, refer to the following.
Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED, Wi-Fi Protected Setup and WPA2 are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
http://(IP address of this product*)/licenses.html
MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
En
175
* IP address of this product is checked with MusicCast
CONTROLLER.
Specifications
Input jacks
Other jacks
• Analog Audio
• YPAO MIC x 1
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, AUX)
• REMOTE IN x 1
Audio (Balance) x 1 (AUDIO 4) (1:GND, 2:HOT, 3:COLD)
• REMOTE OUT x 1
MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
• Digital Audio
Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1-2, AUDIO 3)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 192 kHz)
• Video
Composite x 4 (AV 1-4)
Component x 2 (AV 1-2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 7 (AV 1-7)
• Others
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
– Dolby Digital Plus
– Dolby Digital
– DTS-HD Master Audio
– DTS-HD High Resolution
– DTS Express
– 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60, 50Hz 10/12bit)
– DTS
– 3D Video
– DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
– eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)
– PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24 bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
– HDMI Control (CEC)
(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2/2.3 compatible)
– Auto Lip Sync
– Deep Color
TUNER
– x.v.Color
• Analog Tuner
– HD audio playback
[Australia model]
– Selectable HDMI input in HDMI standby mode
DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
– 480i/60 Hz
(SUBWOOFER 1-2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)
– Dolby TrueHD
• HDMI Features
• Analog Audio
– Subwoofer Out (Unbalance) x 2
– DTS:X
HDMI
– VGA
– Pre Out (Balance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R, R.PRESENCE L/R)
(1:GND, 2: HOT, 3: COLD)
– Dolby Atmos
• RS-232C x 1
Output jacks
– Pre Out (Unbalance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R, R.PRESENCE L/R)
• Supported Audio Formats
[U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models]
DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
– 576i/50 Hz
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
– 480p/60 Hz
– 576p/50 Hz
USB
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
– 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
Bluetooth
• Sink Function
– Subwoofer Out (Balance) x 2
Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
(SUBWOOFER 1-2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)
• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
– ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)
• Bluetooth Version ................................................................... Ver. 4.2
– Headphone x 1
• Supported Profile
Sink Function .................................................................A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported Codec
Sink Function ....................................................................... SBC, AAC
• Wireless Output .......................................................Bluetooth Class 2
• Maximum Communication Distance................................ 10 m (33 ft)
En
176
MusicCast
• Controlled by MusicCast Application (iOS, Android)
• MusicCast Link Client ..........................................Main, Zone2, Zone3
• MusicCast Link Master (Input Source) .................................................
NET/USB/Bluetooth, Analog External Input, Digital External Input,
Zone2
• Network Connectivity ....................................Extend Mode, Connect
Network
• PC Client Function
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
• Wi-Fi function
– Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
– Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection and
USB connection
– Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
– Radio Frequency Band: 2.4/5 GHz
– Wireless LAN Standards: IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac*
* 20 MHz channel bandwidth only
Compatible Decoding Formats
(XLR Balance Preout)
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO ....................................................................................... 45 mV
Front L/R .......................................................................................8.0 V
RCA Unbalance (Audio 2 etc.)...................................................... 2.4 V
Center ...........................................................................................8.0 V
XLR Balance (Audio 4)
Surround L/R ................................................................................8.0 V
Attenuator Off........................................................................... 2.4 V
Surround Back L/R .......................................................................8.0 V
Attenuator On ........................................................................... 4.8 V
Front Presence L/R .......................................................................8.0 V
• Rated Output Level/Impedance
Front L/R............................................................................ 1.0 V/470 Ω
• Headphone Impedance ................................................. 16 Ω or more
Center ................................................................................ 1.0 V/470 Ω
• Frequency Response
Surround L/R..................................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
Surround Back L/R............................................................ 1.0 V/470 Ω
Front Presence L/R ........................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
Rear Presence L/R ............................................................. 1.0 V/470 Ω
(Pure Direct, 1 V)
PHONO to PreOut (RCA Unbalance) (1 kHz)................0.008% or less
(XLR Balance Preout)
AUDIO 2 etc. to PreOut (RCA Unbalance) (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
.......................................................................................0.008% or less
Front L/R............................................................................ 2.0 V/470 Ω
Center ................................................................................ 2.0 V/470 Ω
Surround L/R..................................................................... 2.0 V/470 Ω
Surround Back L/R............................................................ 2.0 V/470 Ω
Front Presence L/R ........................................................... 2.0 V/470 Ω
Rear Presence L/R ............................................................. 2.0 V/470 Ω
– Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
Subwoofer 1–2 .................................................................. 2.0 V/470 Ω
• Maximum Output Level (0.06%THD)
– Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
(RCA Unbalance Preout)
– DTS
Front L/R....................................................................................... 4.0 V
– DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS Express
Center ........................................................................................... 4.0 V
– DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
Surround L/R................................................................................ 4.0 V
Surround Back L/R....................................................................... 4.0 V
– Dolby Surround
Front Presence L/R ...................................................................... 4.0 V
– DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Rear Presence L/R ........................................................................ 4.0 V
Audio Section
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ...................................................... 0±0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
Zone2/Zone3..................................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
– Dolby Atmos
• Post Decoding Format
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) .............................................+0/-3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
Subwoofer 1–2 .................................................................. 1.0 V/470 Ω
• Decoding Format
– DTS:X
Rear Presence L/R ........................................................................8.0 V
Subwoofer 1–2............................................................................13.0 V
(RCA Unbalance Preout)
Subwoofer 1–2 ............................................................................. 6.5 V
Zone2/Zone3................................................................................ 4.0 V
PHONO ........................................................................... 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AUDIO 2 etc. to PreOut (XLR Balance) (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
.......................................................................................0.008% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(Pure Direct, Input 1 kW Shorted)
PHONO to PreOut (XLR Balance/RCA Unbalance) ...... 95 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc. to PreOut (XLR Balance/RCA Unbalance)
..................................................................................... 112 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Preout (RCA Unbalance) ................................................ 2.5 μV or less
Preout (XLR Balance) ..................................................... 5.0 μV or less
• Channel Separation
(Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO............................................................... 86 dB/68 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc........................................................ 86 dB/68 dB or more
• Maximum Gain (Volume: Maximum)
Main Zone Preout ....................................................................... 14 dB
Zone2/Zone3 Preout .................................................................. 14 dB
• Volume Control
RCA Unbalance (Audio 2 etc.) ...................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
Main Zone .............................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
XLR Balance (Audio 4)
Zone2/Zone3 ........................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Attenuator Off.......................................................... 200 mV/200 kΩ
Attenuator On.......................................................... 400 mV/200 kΩ
En
177
• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut .................................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
FM Section
General
• Tuning Range
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...........................87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ............................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
[Brazil, Asia, Taiwan, Central and South America and General models]
.........................................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Brazil and Central and South America models]
..................................................................... AC 110 to 120 V, 50/60 Hz
Treble Turnover.................................................................... 3.5 kHz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models]..............87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
[Taiwan model] .......................................... AC 110 to 120 V, 50/60 Hz
[Other models] ............................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
[China model] ..............................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
Bass Turnover........................................................................ 350 Hz
Zone2/Zone3
Bass Boost/Cut .................................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover........................................................................ 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ............................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover.................................................................... 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
............................................................................................. 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .............................................................. 24 dB/oct.
• Optical/Coaxial Jack Support fs
Optical Jack Support fs ................................................ 32 kHz-96 kHz
Coaxial Jack Support fs.............................................. 32 kHz-192 kHz
Video Section
• Video Signal Type .................................................. NTSC/PAL/SECAM
• Video Signal Level
Composite......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Monaural ...................................................................... 3 μV (20.8 dBf)
[Other model] ............................................. AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Standby Power Consumption
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Monaural/Stereo..............................................................69 dB/68 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Monaural/Stereo................................................................ 0.5%/0.6%
• Antenna Input ..........................................................75 Ω unbalanced
AM section (except Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models)
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
......................................................................................................0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off...................................................................1.4 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired.........................................................................................1.4 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi).........................................................................1.6 W
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...............................530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Brazil, Asia, Taiwan, Central and South America and General models]
...................................................................530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ....................................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz
DAB section (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)
Y...................................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Tuning Range ......................................174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)
Pb/Pr ........................................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Support Audio Format...............MPEG-1 Layer II/MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2
• Video Maximum Input Level.....................................1.5 Vp-p or more
[Korea model]..............................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
• Antenna ....................................................................75 Ω unbalanced
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off,
Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On...............1.4 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby On
(Wi-Fi), Bluetooth Standby On....................................................2.5 W
• Power Consumption ....................................................................65 W
• Power Consumption (No Signals) ...............................................35 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
................................. 435 x 193 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright)
............................... 435 x 270 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 10-5/8” x 18-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusion
• Weight ....................................................................... 15.2 kg (33.5 lbs)
* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the
publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha
website then download the manual file.
En
178
Yamaha Global Site
https://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
https://download.yamaha.com/
Manual Development Group
© 2018 Yamaha Corporation
Published 07/2019 AM-D0
AV17-0237
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising